Rigel 288 331A550 Rev2 4up.qxp

Rigel 288 331A550 Rev2 4up.qxp
Rigel - 288
Hand-Held Electrical Medical
Safety Analyser
Instruction Manual
Bracken Hill, South West Industrial Estate,
Peterlee, Co. Durham SR8 2SW. England.
Tel: 0191-586 3511 Fax: 0191-586 0227
www.rigelmedical.com
[email protected]
[email protected]
Calibration and Repair
Rigel Medical guarantees this product for a period of one year.
The period of warranty will be effective on the day of delivery.
In order to ensure the continued performance of this product
Rigel Medical recommend that it is serviced and calibrated on an
annual basis, by Rigel Medical or an authorised service and
repair centre using Rigel Medical approved parts and
components.
To register your Rigel Medical warranty please use the
detachable, postage paid card contained in this manual. If this
card is not present please contact Rigel Medical.
For this and further information contact:
Rigel Medical
Bracken Hill
South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee
Co Durham
SR8 2SW
England
Tel: +44 (0)191 586 3511
Fax: +44(0)191 586 0227
[email protected]
Rigel 288
Rigel 288
Hand-Held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
Hand-Held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
331A550 Issue 2.0
331A550 Issue 2.0
November 2007
© 2007 Seaward Group
Issue 2.0
November 2007
© 2007 Seaward Group
Issue 2.0
November 2007
© 2007 Seaward Group
Issue 2.0
Rigel 288
Rigel 288
Hand-Held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
Hand-Held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
331A550 Issue 2.0
331A550 Issue 2.0
November 2007
© 2007 Seaward Group
Issue 2.0
Limited Warranty & Limitation of Liability
Limited Warranty & Limitation of Liability
Rigel Medical, part of the SEAWARD GROUP guarantees this product for a period of 1
year. The period of warranty will be effective at the day of delivery.
Rigel Medical, part of the SEAWARD GROUP guarantees this product for a period of 1
year. The period of warranty will be effective at the day of delivery.
© Copyright 2007
All rights reserved. Nothing from this edition may be multiplied, or made public in any
form or manner, either electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, recording, or in
any manner, without prior written consent from the SEAWARD GROUP. This also
applies to accompanying drawings and diagrams.
© Copyright 2007
All rights reserved. Nothing from this edition may be multiplied, or made public in any
form or manner, either electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, recording, or in
any manner, without prior written consent from the SEAWARD GROUP. This also
applies to accompanying drawings and diagrams.
Due to a policy of continuous development the SEAWARD GROUP reserves the right
to alter the equipment specification and description outlined in this publication without
prior notice and no part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract
for the equipment unless specifically referred to as an inclusion within such contract.
Due to a policy of continuous development the SEAWARD GROUP reserves the right
to alter the equipment specification and description outlined in this publication without
prior notice and no part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract
for the equipment unless specifically referred to as an inclusion within such contract.
Limited Warranty & Limitation of Liability
Limited Warranty & Limitation of Liability
Rigel Medical, part of the SEAWARD GROUP guarantees this product for a period of 1
year. The period of warranty will be effective at the day of delivery.
Rigel Medical, part of the SEAWARD GROUP guarantees this product for a period of 1
year. The period of warranty will be effective at the day of delivery.
© Copyright 2007
All rights reserved. Nothing from this edition may be multiplied, or made public in any
form or manner, either electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, recording, or in
any manner, without prior written consent from the SEAWARD GROUP. This also
applies to accompanying drawings and diagrams.
© Copyright 2007
All rights reserved. Nothing from this edition may be multiplied, or made public in any
form or manner, either electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, recording, or in
any manner, without prior written consent from the SEAWARD GROUP. This also
applies to accompanying drawings and diagrams.
Due to a policy of continuous development the SEAWARD GROUP reserves the right
to alter the equipment specification and description outlined in this publication without
prior notice and no part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract
for the equipment unless specifically referred to as an inclusion within such contract.
Due to a policy of continuous development the SEAWARD GROUP reserves the right
to alter the equipment specification and description outlined in this publication without
prior notice and no part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract
for the equipment unless specifically referred to as an inclusion within such contract.
Index
1.
Index
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................8
1.
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................8
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy ........................................................................8
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy ........................................................................8
1.2.
Key Features.................................................................................................9
1.2.
Key Features.................................................................................................9
1.3.
Interfaces ......................................................................................................9
1.3.
Interfaces ......................................................................................................9
1.4.
Rigel 288 includes:......................................................................................10
1.4.
Rigel 288 includes:......................................................................................10
1.5.
Optional Accessories ..................................................................................10
1.5.
Optional Accessories ..................................................................................10
1.6.
Test ’n Tag Compatible ...............................................................................10
1.6.
Test ’n Tag Compatible ...............................................................................10
1.7.
Unique use of ICONS .................................................................................11
1.7.
Unique use of ICONS .................................................................................11
2.
LOGGING ON .............................................................................. - 12 -
2.
LOGGING ON .............................................................................. - 12 -
3.
SETTING-UP YOUR TESTER ..................................................... - 13 -
3.
SETTING-UP YOUR TESTER ..................................................... - 13 -
3.1.
3.2.
Test Sequences ..................................................................................... - 13 -
3.1.
User definable tests .................................................................. - 14 -
3.1.1.
User definable tests .................................................................. - 14 -
3.1.2.
View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine. ........................ - 14 -
3.1.2.
View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine. ........................ - 14 -
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences................................. - 15 -
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences................................. - 15 -
3.1.3.
Edit individual Test.................................................................... - 18 -
3.1.3.
Edit individual Test.................................................................... - 18 -
3.1.4.
Insert an individual safety test .................................................. - 19 -
3.1.4.
Insert an individual safety test .................................................. - 19 -
3.1.5.
Insert a non-electrical safety test.............................................. - 20 -
3.1.5.
Insert a non-electrical safety test.............................................. - 20 -
3.1.6.
Create a new Test Sequence.................................................... - 22 -
3.1.6.
Create a new Test Sequence.................................................... - 22 -
Test Codes............................................................................................. - 24 -
3.2.
Create New Test Codes............................................................ - 25 -
3.2.1.
Create New Test Codes............................................................ - 25 -
3.2.2.
Configuring the Applied Part Module........................................ - 26 -
3.2.2.
Configuring the Applied Part Module........................................ - 26 -
Asset Trace Variables ............................................................................ - 30 -
3.3.
3.4.
System Config........................................................................................ - 31 -
3.4.
3.6.
Test Codes............................................................................................. - 24 -
3.2.1.
3.3.
3.5.
Test Sequences ..................................................................................... - 13 -
3.1.1.
Asset Trace Variables ............................................................................ - 30 System Config........................................................................................ - 31 -
3.4.1.
Asset ID..................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.1.
Asset ID..................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.2.
After Test................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.2.
After Test................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.3.
Comments ................................................................................ - 32 -
3.4.3.
Comments ................................................................................ - 32 -
3.4.4.
Applied Part Results ................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.4.
Applied Part Results ................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.5.
Language .................................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.5.
Language .................................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.6.
Check IEC lead Polarity ............................................................ - 33 -
3.4.6.
Check IEC lead Polarity ............................................................ - 33 -
3.4.7.
Date / Time................................................................................ - 33 -
3.4.7.
Date / Time................................................................................ - 33 -
Blue Tooth Favourites ............................................................................ - 34 -
3.5.
User Admin ............................................................................................ - 38 -
3.6.
Blue Tooth Favourites ............................................................................ - 34 User Admin ............................................................................................ - 38 -
3.6.1.
Preferences ............................................................................... - 38 -
3.6.1.
Preferences ............................................................................... - 38 -
3.6.2.
Change User ............................................................................. - 40 -
3.6.2.
Change User ............................................................................. - 40 -
3.6.3.
Change Password..................................................................... - 40 -
3.6.3.
Change Password..................................................................... - 40 -
3.6.4.
User Profile ............................................................................... - 40 -
3.6.4.
User Profile ............................................................................... - 40 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
3
Index
1.
3
Index
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................8
1.
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................8
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy ........................................................................8
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy ........................................................................8
1.2.
Key Features.................................................................................................9
1.2.
Key Features.................................................................................................9
1.3.
Interfaces ......................................................................................................9
1.3.
Interfaces ......................................................................................................9
1.4.
Rigel 288 includes:......................................................................................10
1.4.
Rigel 288 includes:......................................................................................10
1.5.
Optional Accessories ..................................................................................10
1.5.
Optional Accessories ..................................................................................10
1.6.
Test ’n Tag Compatible ...............................................................................10
1.6.
Test ’n Tag Compatible ...............................................................................10
1.7.
Unique use of ICONS .................................................................................11
1.7.
Unique use of ICONS .................................................................................11
2.
LOGGING ON .............................................................................. - 12 -
2.
LOGGING ON .............................................................................. - 12 -
3.
SETTING-UP YOUR TESTER ..................................................... - 13 -
3.
SETTING-UP YOUR TESTER ..................................................... - 13 -
3.1.
3.2.
Test Sequences ..................................................................................... - 13 -
3.1.
Test Sequences ..................................................................................... - 13 -
3.1.1.
User definable tests .................................................................. - 14 -
3.1.1.
User definable tests .................................................................. - 14 -
3.1.2.
View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine. ........................ - 14 -
3.1.2.
View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine. ........................ - 14 -
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences................................. - 15 -
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences................................. - 15 -
3.1.3.
Edit individual Test.................................................................... - 18 -
3.1.3.
Edit individual Test.................................................................... - 18 -
3.1.4.
Insert an individual safety test .................................................. - 19 -
3.1.4.
Insert an individual safety test .................................................. - 19 -
3.1.5.
Insert a non-electrical safety test.............................................. - 20 -
3.1.5.
Insert a non-electrical safety test.............................................. - 20 -
3.1.6.
Create a new Test Sequence.................................................... - 22 -
3.1.6.
Create a new Test Sequence.................................................... - 22 -
Test Codes............................................................................................. - 24 -
3.2.
Test Codes............................................................................................. - 24 -
3.2.1.
Create New Test Codes............................................................ - 25 -
3.2.1.
Create New Test Codes............................................................ - 25 -
3.2.2.
Configuring the Applied Part Module........................................ - 26 -
3.2.2.
Configuring the Applied Part Module........................................ - 26 -
3.3.
Asset Trace Variables ............................................................................ - 30 -
3.3.
3.4.
System Config........................................................................................ - 31 -
3.4.
Asset Trace Variables ............................................................................ - 30 System Config........................................................................................ - 31 -
3.4.1.
Asset ID..................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.1.
Asset ID..................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.2.
After Test................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.2.
After Test................................................................................... - 32 -
3.4.3.
Comments ................................................................................ - 32 -
3.4.3.
Comments ................................................................................ - 32 -
3.4.4.
Applied Part Results ................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.4.
Applied Part Results ................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.5.
Language .................................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.5.
Language .................................................................................. - 33 -
3.4.6.
Check IEC lead Polarity ............................................................ - 33 -
3.4.6.
Check IEC lead Polarity ............................................................ - 33 -
3.4.7.
Date / Time................................................................................ - 33 -
3.4.7.
Date / Time................................................................................ - 33 -
3.5.
Blue Tooth Favourites ............................................................................ - 34 -
3.5.
Blue Tooth Favourites ............................................................................ - 34 -
3.6.
User Admin ............................................................................................ - 38 -
3.6.
User Admin ............................................................................................ - 38 -
3.6.1.
Preferences ............................................................................... - 38 -
3.6.1.
3.6.2.
Change User ............................................................................. - 40 -
3.6.2.
Change User ............................................................................. - 40 -
3.6.3.
Change Password..................................................................... - 40 -
3.6.3.
Change Password..................................................................... - 40 -
3.6.4.
User Profile ............................................................................... - 40 -
3.6.4.
User Profile ............................................................................... - 40 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
3
Preferences ............................................................................... - 38 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
3
4.
3.7.
Memory options ..................................................................................... - 41 -
3.7.
Memory options ..................................................................................... - 41 -
3.8.
Restore Factory Settings........................................................................ - 42 -
3.8.
Restore Factory Settings........................................................................ - 42 -
AUTOMATIC MODE .................................................................... - 43 4.1.
5.
6.
7.
6.
7.
4.1.
Performing an Automatic Test:............................................................... - 43 -
Semi Automatic Test Mode ...................................................... - 44 -
4.1.1.
Semi Automatic Test Mode ...................................................... - 44 -
4.1.2.
Failure Menu ............................................................................. - 44 -
4.1.2.
Failure Menu ............................................................................. - 44 -
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag ............................................................................................. - 54 -
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag ............................................................................................. - 54 -
4.3.
Options Menu......................................................................................... - 54 -
4.3.
Options Menu......................................................................................... - 54 -
4.4.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 55 -
4.4.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 55 -
MANUAL MODE .......................................................................... - 56 -
5.
MANUAL MODE .......................................................................... - 56 -
5.1.1.
Earth Continuity ........................................................................ - 58 -
5.1.1.
Earth Continuity ........................................................................ - 58 -
5.1.2.
Insulation Resistance EUT ........................................................ - 59 -
5.1.2.
Insulation Resistance EUT ........................................................ - 59 -
5.1.3.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts ......................................... - 61 -
5.1.3.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts ......................................... - 61 -
5.1.4.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains........................... - 62 -
5.1.4.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains........................... - 62 -
5.1.5.
Equipment Leakage (Direct)...................................................... - 62 -
5.1.5.
Equipment Leakage (Direct)...................................................... - 62 -
5.1.6.
Equipment Leakage (Differential) .............................................. - 64 -
5.1.6.
Equipment Leakage (Differential) .............................................. - 64 -
5.1.7.
Equipment Leakage (Alternative) .............................................. - 66 -
5.1.7.
Equipment Leakage (Alternative) .............................................. - 66 -
5.1.8.
Applied Part Leakage (Direct) ................................................... - 67 -
5.1.8.
Applied Part Leakage (Direct) ................................................... - 67 -
5.1.9.
Applied Part Leakage (Alternative) ............................................ - 68 -
5.1.9.
Applied Part Leakage (Alternative) ............................................ - 68 -
5.1.10.
Earth Leakage Test .................................................................. - 70 -
5.1.10.
Earth Leakage Test .................................................................. - 70 -
5.1.11.
Enclosure Leakage Test .......................................................... - 71 -
5.1.11.
Enclosure Leakage Test .......................................................... - 71 -
5.1.12.
Patient Leakage ....................................................................... - 72 -
5.1.12.
Patient Leakage ....................................................................... - 72 -
5.1.13.
Patient Leakage – F-Type ........................................................ - 74 -
5.1.13.
Patient Leakage – F-Type ........................................................ - 74 -
5.1.14.
Patient Auxiliary Current .......................................................... - 75 -
5.1.14.
Patient Auxiliary Current .......................................................... - 75 -
5.1.15.
Load Test ................................................................................. - 77 -
5.1.15.
Load Test ................................................................................. - 77 -
5.1.16.
IEC Lead .................................................................................. - 77 -
5.1.16.
IEC Lead .................................................................................. - 77 -
VIEW DATA.................................................................................. - 79 -
6.
VIEW DATA.................................................................................. - 79 -
6.1.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 80 -
6.1.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 80 -
6.2.
Search the database .............................................................................. - 81 -
6.2.
Search the database .............................................................................. - 81 -
6.3.
View Data Options ................................................................................. - 82 -
6.3.
View Data Options ................................................................................. - 82 -
DATA TRANSFER ....................................................................... - 83 -
7.
DATA TRANSFER ....................................................................... - 83 -
7.1.
Download to PC ..................................................................................... - 83 -
7.1.
Download to PC ..................................................................................... - 83 -
7.2.
Upload from PC ..................................................................................... - 84 -
7.2.
Upload from PC ..................................................................................... - 84 -
7.3.
Configuration Data ................................................................................. - 85 -
7.3.
7.3.1.
Send Config Data...................................................................... - 85 -
7.3.2.
Receive Config Data ................................................................. - 87 -
Configuration Data ................................................................................. - 85 7.3.1.
Send Config Data...................................................................... - 85 -
7.3.2.
Receive Config Data ................................................................. - 87 -
7.4.
Clone Data ............................................................................................. - 88 -
7.4.
Clone Data ............................................................................................. - 88 -
7.5.
Load TnT Logo....................................................................................... - 88 -
7.5.
Load TnT Logo....................................................................................... - 88 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
4
4
3.7.
Memory options ..................................................................................... - 41 -
3.7.
Memory options ..................................................................................... - 41 -
3.8.
Restore Factory Settings........................................................................ - 42 -
3.8.
Restore Factory Settings........................................................................ - 42 -
AUTOMATIC MODE .................................................................... - 43 4.1.
5.
AUTOMATIC MODE .................................................................... - 43 -
4.1.1.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
4.
4.
Performing an Automatic Test:............................................................... - 43 -
4.
Performing an Automatic Test:............................................................... - 43 -
AUTOMATIC MODE .................................................................... - 43 4.1.
Performing an Automatic Test:............................................................... - 43 -
4.1.1.
Semi Automatic Test Mode ...................................................... - 44 -
4.1.1.
Semi Automatic Test Mode ...................................................... - 44 -
4.1.2.
Failure Menu ............................................................................. - 44 -
4.1.2.
Failure Menu ............................................................................. - 44 -
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag ............................................................................................. - 54 -
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag ............................................................................................. - 54 -
4.3.
Options Menu......................................................................................... - 54 -
4.3.
Options Menu......................................................................................... - 54 -
4.4.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 55 -
4.4.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 55 -
MANUAL MODE .......................................................................... - 56 -
5.
MANUAL MODE .......................................................................... - 56 -
5.1.1.
Earth Continuity ........................................................................ - 58 -
5.1.1.
Earth Continuity ........................................................................ - 58 -
5.1.2.
Insulation Resistance EUT ........................................................ - 59 -
5.1.2.
Insulation Resistance EUT ........................................................ - 59 -
5.1.3.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts ......................................... - 61 -
5.1.3.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts ......................................... - 61 -
5.1.4.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains........................... - 62 -
5.1.4.
Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains........................... - 62 -
5.1.5.
Equipment Leakage (Direct)...................................................... - 62 -
5.1.5.
Equipment Leakage (Direct)...................................................... - 62 -
5.1.6.
Equipment Leakage (Differential) .............................................. - 64 -
5.1.6.
Equipment Leakage (Differential) .............................................. - 64 -
5.1.7.
Equipment Leakage (Alternative) .............................................. - 66 -
5.1.7.
Equipment Leakage (Alternative) .............................................. - 66 -
5.1.8.
Applied Part Leakage (Direct) ................................................... - 67 -
5.1.8.
Applied Part Leakage (Direct) ................................................... - 67 -
5.1.9.
Applied Part Leakage (Alternative) ............................................ - 68 -
5.1.9.
Applied Part Leakage (Alternative) ............................................ - 68 -
5.1.10.
Earth Leakage Test .................................................................. - 70 -
5.1.10.
Earth Leakage Test .................................................................. - 70 -
5.1.11.
Enclosure Leakage Test .......................................................... - 71 -
5.1.11.
Enclosure Leakage Test .......................................................... - 71 -
5.1.12.
Patient Leakage ....................................................................... - 72 -
5.1.12.
Patient Leakage ....................................................................... - 72 -
5.1.13.
Patient Leakage – F-Type ........................................................ - 74 -
5.1.13.
Patient Leakage – F-Type ........................................................ - 74 -
5.1.14.
Patient Auxiliary Current .......................................................... - 75 -
5.1.14.
Patient Auxiliary Current .......................................................... - 75 -
5.1.15.
Load Test ................................................................................. - 77 -
5.1.15.
Load Test ................................................................................. - 77 -
5.1.16.
IEC Lead .................................................................................. - 77 -
5.1.16.
IEC Lead .................................................................................. - 77 -
VIEW DATA.................................................................................. - 79 -
6.
VIEW DATA.................................................................................. - 79 -
6.1.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 80 -
6.1.
View Results .......................................................................................... - 80 -
6.2.
Search the database .............................................................................. - 81 -
6.2.
Search the database .............................................................................. - 81 -
6.3.
View Data Options ................................................................................. - 82 -
6.3.
View Data Options ................................................................................. - 82 -
DATA TRANSFER ....................................................................... - 83 -
7.
DATA TRANSFER ....................................................................... - 83 -
7.1.
Download to PC ..................................................................................... - 83 -
7.1.
Download to PC ..................................................................................... - 83 -
7.2.
Upload from PC ..................................................................................... - 84 -
7.2.
Upload from PC ..................................................................................... - 84 -
7.3.
Configuration Data ................................................................................. - 85 -
7.3.
Configuration Data ................................................................................. - 85 -
7.3.1.
Send Config Data...................................................................... - 85 -
7.3.1.
Send Config Data...................................................................... - 85 -
7.3.2.
Receive Config Data ................................................................. - 87 -
7.3.2.
Receive Config Data ................................................................. - 87 -
7.4.
Clone Data ............................................................................................. - 88 -
7.4.
Clone Data ............................................................................................. - 88 -
7.5.
Load TnT Logo....................................................................................... - 88 -
7.5.
Load TnT Logo....................................................................................... - 88 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
4
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
4
8.
ABOUT ......................................................................................... - 89 -
8.
ABOUT ......................................................................................... - 89 -
9.
MAINTAINING THE RIGEL 288 .................................................. - 90 -
9.
MAINTAINING THE RIGEL 288 .................................................. - 90 -
10
9.1.
Cleaning the Analyser ............................................................................ - 90 -
9.1.
9.2.
User Maintenance .................................................................................. - 90 -
9.2.
User Maintenance .................................................................................. - 90 -
9.3.
Return Instructions. ................................................................................ - 90 -
9.3.
Return Instructions. ................................................................................ - 90 -
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. - 92 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
10
5
Cleaning the Analyser ............................................................................ - 90 -
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. - 92 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5
8.
ABOUT ......................................................................................... - 89 -
8.
ABOUT ......................................................................................... - 89 -
9.
MAINTAINING THE RIGEL 288 .................................................. - 90 -
9.
MAINTAINING THE RIGEL 288 .................................................. - 90 -
10
9.1.
Cleaning the Analyser ............................................................................ - 90 -
9.1.
9.2.
User Maintenance .................................................................................. - 90 -
9.2.
User Maintenance .................................................................................. - 90 -
9.3.
Return Instructions. ................................................................................ - 90 -
9.3.
Return Instructions. ................................................................................ - 90 -
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. - 92 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5
10
Cleaning the Analyser ............................................................................ - 90 -
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................. - 92 -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
The Rigel 288 Hand-held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
The Rigel 288 Hand-held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
Manufactured by:
Manufactured by:
Seaward Electronic Ltd, Bracken Hill, South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, County Durham, SR8 2SW, England
Seaward Electronic Ltd, Bracken Hill, South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, County Durham, SR8 2SW, England
Millennium Statement
Millennium Statement
This product is Millennium compliant, and conforms fully to the document BSI DISC
PD2000-1.
This product is Millennium compliant, and conforms fully to the document BSI DISC
PD2000-1.
Statement of Conformity
Statement of Conformity
Based on test results using appropriate standards, the product conforms with
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC
Based on test results using appropriate standards, the product conforms with
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC
Standards used:
Standards used:
EN 60601-1 (1990) Medical Electrical Equipment. General Requirements for Safety
EN 61010-1 (1993) Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use
EN 50081-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Emission Standard:
EN55022 Class B
EN 50082-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Immunity Standard:
IEC1000-4-2, -4-3, -4-4, -4-5
EN 60601-1 (1990) Medical Electrical Equipment. General Requirements for Safety
EN 61010-1 (1993) Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use
EN 50081-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Emission Standard:
EN55022 Class B
EN 50082-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Immunity Standard:
IEC1000-4-2, -4-3, -4-4, -4-5
The tests have been performed in a typical configuration.
The tests have been performed in a typical configuration.
This Conformity is indicated by the symbol
, i.e. “Conformité Européenne”
This Conformity is indicated by the symbol
WEEE Directive
, i.e. “Conformité Européenne”
WEEE Directive
The Rigel 288 has been designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components, which can be recycled and
reused.
The Rigel 288 has been designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components, which can be recycled and
reused.
Please inform yourself about the local collection system for
electrical and electronic products or contact your local
supplier for further information.
Please inform yourself about the local collection system for
electrical and electronic products or contact your local
supplier for further information.
We ask you to respect your local rules and do not dispose of
your old product with your general waist. By offering your old
products for recycling, you will help prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health.
We ask you to respect your local rules and do not dispose of
your old product with your general waist. By offering your old
products for recycling, you will help prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
6
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Declaration of Conformity
6
Declaration of Conformity
The Rigel 288 Hand-held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
The Rigel 288 Hand-held Electrical Medical Safety Analyser
Manufactured by:
Manufactured by:
Seaward Electronic Ltd, Bracken Hill, South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, County Durham, SR8 2SW, England
Seaward Electronic Ltd, Bracken Hill, South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, County Durham, SR8 2SW, England
Millennium Statement
Millennium Statement
This product is Millennium compliant, and conforms fully to the document BSI DISC
PD2000-1.
This product is Millennium compliant, and conforms fully to the document BSI DISC
PD2000-1.
Statement of Conformity
Statement of Conformity
Based on test results using appropriate standards, the product conforms with
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC
Based on test results using appropriate standards, the product conforms with
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC
Standards used:
Standards used:
EN 60601-1 (1990) Medical Electrical Equipment. General Requirements for Safety
EN 61010-1 (1993) Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use
EN 50081-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Emission Standard:
EN55022 Class B
EN 50082-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Immunity Standard:
IEC1000-4-2, -4-3, -4-4, -4-5
EN 60601-1 (1990) Medical Electrical Equipment. General Requirements for Safety
EN 61010-1 (1993) Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use
EN 50081-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Emission Standard:
EN55022 Class B
EN 50082-1 (1992) Electromagnetic Compatibility. Generic Immunity Standard:
IEC1000-4-2, -4-3, -4-4, -4-5
The tests have been performed in a typical configuration.
The tests have been performed in a typical configuration.
This Conformity is indicated by the symbol
, i.e. “Conformité Européenne”
This Conformity is indicated by the symbol
WEEE Directive
, i.e. “Conformité Européenne”
WEEE Directive
The Rigel 288 has been designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components, which can be recycled and
reused.
The Rigel 288 has been designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components, which can be recycled and
reused.
Please inform yourself about the local collection system for
electrical and electronic products or contact your local
supplier for further information.
Please inform yourself about the local collection system for
electrical and electronic products or contact your local
supplier for further information.
We ask you to respect your local rules and do not dispose of
your old product with your general waist. By offering your old
products for recycling, you will help prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health.
We ask you to respect your local rules and do not dispose of
your old product with your general waist. By offering your old
products for recycling, you will help prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human health.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
6
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
6
User Notes
User Notes
These operating instructions are intended for the use of adequately trained
personnel.
These operating instructions are intended for the use of adequately trained
personnel.
The following symbols are used in these operating instructions and on the Rigel 288.
The following symbols are used in these operating instructions and on the Rigel 288.
Warning of electrical danger!
Indicates instructions must be followed to avoid danger to persons.
Warning of electrical danger!
Indicates instructions must be followed to avoid danger to persons.
Important, follow the documentation! This symbol indicates that the
operating instructions must be adhered to in order to avoid danger.
Important, follow the documentation! This symbol indicates that the
operating instructions must be adhered to in order to avoid danger.
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
Do not connect any probe combination to the maximum permitted
voltage of 30 V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when
performing non-power tests. Danger of electric shock.
Do not connect any probe combination to the maximum permitted
voltage of 30 V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when
performing non-power tests. Danger of electric shock.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
7
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
7
User Notes
User Notes
These operating instructions are intended for the use of adequately trained
personnel.
These operating instructions are intended for the use of adequately trained
personnel.
The following symbols are used in these operating instructions and on the Rigel 288.
The following symbols are used in these operating instructions and on the Rigel 288.
Warning of electrical danger!
Indicates instructions must be followed to avoid danger to persons.
Warning of electrical danger!
Indicates instructions must be followed to avoid danger to persons.
Important, follow the documentation! This symbol indicates that the
operating instructions must be adhered to in order to avoid danger.
Important, follow the documentation! This symbol indicates that the
operating instructions must be adhered to in order to avoid danger.
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
Do not connect any probe combination to the maximum permitted
voltage of 30 V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when
performing non-power tests. Danger of electric shock.
Do not connect any probe combination to the maximum permitted
voltage of 30 V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when
performing non-power tests. Danger of electric shock.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
7
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
7
1. Introduction
1. Introduction
The Rigel 288 is the FIRST universal truly hand-held medical electrical safety tester to
combine the features of an automatic / manual tester with a data logging / asset
management facility. A compact lightweight design and long life battery power reduces
downtime between tests, making the instrument totally practical and highly portable for
multi site use.
The Rigel 288 is the FIRST universal truly hand-held medical electrical safety tester to
combine the features of an automatic / manual tester with a data logging / asset
management facility. A compact lightweight design and long life battery power reduces
downtime between tests, making the instrument totally practical and highly portable for
multi site use.
In addition to IEC 60601-1 and AAMI / NFPA 99, the Rigel 288 tests to the new
standard for in-service and after repair testing of medical electronic devices, currently
drafted in as the IEC 62353. The Rigel 288’s large internal memory facilitates the
storage of test results for safety audit and traceability purposes. Comprehensive
database software is available to ensure fast and easy download of test results,
managing your asset database, creation of test sequences, scheduling of Preventative
Product Maintenance and producing test certificates.
In addition to IEC 60601-1 and AAMI / NFPA 99, the Rigel 288 tests to the new
standard for in-service and after repair testing of medical electronic devices, currently
drafted in as the IEC 62353. The Rigel 288’s large internal memory facilitates the
storage of test results for safety audit and traceability purposes. Comprehensive
database software is available to ensure fast and easy download of test results,
managing your asset database, creation of test sequences, scheduling of Preventative
Product Maintenance and producing test certificates.
Wireless connection means that stored data can be transferred immediately and
directly from the tester to PC-based record keeping systems at the touch of a button.
Wireless connection means that stored data can be transferred immediately and
directly from the tester to PC-based record keeping systems at the touch of a button.
The highly versatile Rigel 288 represents the next generation of electrical medical
safety analysers.
The highly versatile Rigel 288 represents the next generation of electrical medical
safety analysers.
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy
The Rigel 288 has been designed to address the increasing demand for smaller more
comprehensive test equipment within the Healthcare Industry. What better way than to
combine such tester with the new International In-Service Test required as per IEC
62353.
The Rigel 288 has been designed to address the increasing demand for smaller more
comprehensive test equipment within the Healthcare Industry. What better way than to
combine such tester with the new International In-Service Test required as per IEC
62353.
The challenge was to combine the benefits of the size and weight of a smaller handheld and portable Analyser with the test power and convenience of a larger benchmounted automatic safety analyser. Today’s industry demands test equipment that
can save time and cost, thus offering greater flexibility. These factors have all been
taken into account during the development of the Rigel 288. The test capabilities and
functionality exceed that of most common bench mounted safety analysers yet the
instrument is only a fraction of the size and weight.
The challenge was to combine the benefits of the size and weight of a smaller handheld and portable Analyser with the test power and convenience of a larger benchmounted automatic safety analyser. Today’s industry demands test equipment that
can save time and cost, thus offering greater flexibility. These factors have all been
taken into account during the development of the Rigel 288. The test capabilities and
functionality exceed that of most common bench mounted safety analysers yet the
instrument is only a fraction of the size and weight.
No other safety tester on the market offers a hand-held enclosure with the test
capabilities of that of an automatic safety analyser; including IEC 60601 and IEC 62353
leakage tests, up to 10 Patient Connections, alpha numeric keyboard, graphic user
interface, large internal memory, Blue Tooth communication, asset management
facilities, user configurable Performance Tests and more.
No other safety tester on the market offers a hand-held enclosure with the test
capabilities of that of an automatic safety analyser; including IEC 60601 and IEC 62353
leakage tests, up to 10 Patient Connections, alpha numeric keyboard, graphic user
interface, large internal memory, Blue Tooth communication, asset management
facilities, user configurable Performance Tests and more.
We believe that the new Rigel 288 is set to become the new standard in Electrical
Medical Safety Testing.
We believe that the new Rigel 288 is set to become the new standard in Electrical
Medical Safety Testing.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
8
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
8
1. Introduction
1. Introduction
The Rigel 288 is the FIRST universal truly hand-held medical electrical safety tester to
combine the features of an automatic / manual tester with a data logging / asset
management facility. A compact lightweight design and long life battery power reduces
downtime between tests, making the instrument totally practical and highly portable for
multi site use.
The Rigel 288 is the FIRST universal truly hand-held medical electrical safety tester to
combine the features of an automatic / manual tester with a data logging / asset
management facility. A compact lightweight design and long life battery power reduces
downtime between tests, making the instrument totally practical and highly portable for
multi site use.
In addition to IEC 60601-1 and AAMI / NFPA 99, the Rigel 288 tests to the new
standard for in-service and after repair testing of medical electronic devices, currently
drafted in as the IEC 62353. The Rigel 288’s large internal memory facilitates the
storage of test results for safety audit and traceability purposes. Comprehensive
database software is available to ensure fast and easy download of test results,
managing your asset database, creation of test sequences, scheduling of Preventative
Product Maintenance and producing test certificates.
In addition to IEC 60601-1 and AAMI / NFPA 99, the Rigel 288 tests to the new
standard for in-service and after repair testing of medical electronic devices, currently
drafted in as the IEC 62353. The Rigel 288’s large internal memory facilitates the
storage of test results for safety audit and traceability purposes. Comprehensive
database software is available to ensure fast and easy download of test results,
managing your asset database, creation of test sequences, scheduling of Preventative
Product Maintenance and producing test certificates.
Wireless connection means that stored data can be transferred immediately and
directly from the tester to PC-based record keeping systems at the touch of a button.
Wireless connection means that stored data can be transferred immediately and
directly from the tester to PC-based record keeping systems at the touch of a button.
The highly versatile Rigel 288 represents the next generation of electrical medical
safety analysers.
The highly versatile Rigel 288 represents the next generation of electrical medical
safety analysers.
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy
1.1.
Rigel 288 Design Philosophy
The Rigel 288 has been designed to address the increasing demand for smaller more
comprehensive test equipment within the Healthcare Industry. What better way than to
combine such tester with the new International In-Service Test required as per IEC
62353.
The Rigel 288 has been designed to address the increasing demand for smaller more
comprehensive test equipment within the Healthcare Industry. What better way than to
combine such tester with the new International In-Service Test required as per IEC
62353.
The challenge was to combine the benefits of the size and weight of a smaller handheld and portable Analyser with the test power and convenience of a larger benchmounted automatic safety analyser. Today’s industry demands test equipment that
can save time and cost, thus offering greater flexibility. These factors have all been
taken into account during the development of the Rigel 288. The test capabilities and
functionality exceed that of most common bench mounted safety analysers yet the
instrument is only a fraction of the size and weight.
The challenge was to combine the benefits of the size and weight of a smaller handheld and portable Analyser with the test power and convenience of a larger benchmounted automatic safety analyser. Today’s industry demands test equipment that
can save time and cost, thus offering greater flexibility. These factors have all been
taken into account during the development of the Rigel 288. The test capabilities and
functionality exceed that of most common bench mounted safety analysers yet the
instrument is only a fraction of the size and weight.
No other safety tester on the market offers a hand-held enclosure with the test
capabilities of that of an automatic safety analyser; including IEC 60601 and IEC 62353
leakage tests, up to 10 Patient Connections, alpha numeric keyboard, graphic user
interface, large internal memory, Blue Tooth communication, asset management
facilities, user configurable Performance Tests and more.
No other safety tester on the market offers a hand-held enclosure with the test
capabilities of that of an automatic safety analyser; including IEC 60601 and IEC 62353
leakage tests, up to 10 Patient Connections, alpha numeric keyboard, graphic user
interface, large internal memory, Blue Tooth communication, asset management
facilities, user configurable Performance Tests and more.
We believe that the new Rigel 288 is set to become the new standard in Electrical
Medical Safety Testing.
We believe that the new Rigel 288 is set to become the new standard in Electrical
Medical Safety Testing.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
8
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
8
1.2.
Key Features
1.2.
Key Features
Versatile - Test in Accordance with the leakage requirements of IEC/EN 60601-1,
AAMI and NFPA, IEC 62353 (VDE 0751-1) using separate IEC 60601 and AAMI Body
Model
Versatile - Test in Accordance with the leakage requirements of IEC/EN 60601-1,
AAMI and NFPA, IEC 62353 (VDE 0751-1) using separate IEC 60601 and AAMI Body
Model
Hand-held - Using purpose designed robust enclosure, the Rigel 288 is truly handheld, easy to hold single handed thus enabling one hand operation and navigation
Hand-held - Using purpose designed robust enclosure, the Rigel 288 is truly handheld, easy to hold single handed thus enabling one hand operation and navigation
Easy to use - A full graphic, monochrome LCD display (1/4 VGA minimum) in
combination with an integral alpha-numeric ABCD-key-board.
Easy to use - A full graphic, monochrome LCD display (1/4 VGA minimum) in
combination with an integral alpha-numeric ABCD-key-board.
Manual and Automatic test modes - Able to perform UTS (Unique Test Sequence)
and allows fully automatic, semi automatic and fully manual testing.
Manual and Automatic test modes - Able to perform UTS (Unique Test Sequence)
and allows fully automatic, semi automatic and fully manual testing.
User definable test routines - Users have the ability to amend the default programs
or create new programs by copying the preset test programs. Each program will have
a unique Identifier.
User definable test routines - Users have the ability to amend the default programs
or create new programs by copying the preset test programs. Each program will have
a unique Identifier.
Multiple Applied Part function - This feature gives the user the capability of testing
up to 10 individual Applied Parts from different Modules or classes e.g. BF and CF
class, or Bf ECG and Bf SPO2 module.
Multiple Applied Part function - This feature gives the user the capability of testing
up to 10 individual Applied Parts from different Modules or classes e.g. BF and CF
class, or Bf ECG and Bf SPO2 module.
Internal Asset management facilities - Store up to 10,000 test records, custom test
routines, visual inspections and performance tests and download to and from PC via
Blue Tooth Interface.
Internal Asset management facilities - Store up to 10,000 test records, custom test
routines, visual inspections and performance tests and download to and from PC via
Blue Tooth Interface.
1.3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Interfaces
1.3.
Alpha Numeric keyboard, Up / Down and Left / Right cursor control.
4 Programmable soft keys below display
Larger Green and Red key
Full graphic Monochrone LCD, blue with white backlit, 1/4 VGA
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
1.2.
1)
2)
3)
4)
9
Key Features
Interfaces
Alpha Numeric keyboard, Up / Down and Left / Right cursor control.
4 Programmable soft keys below display
Larger Green and Red key
Full graphic Monochrone LCD, blue with white backlit, 1/4 VGA
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
1.2.
9
Key Features
Versatile - Test in Accordance with the leakage requirements of IEC/EN 60601-1,
AAMI and NFPA, IEC 62353 (VDE 0751-1) using separate IEC 60601 and AAMI Body
Model
Versatile - Test in Accordance with the leakage requirements of IEC/EN 60601-1,
AAMI and NFPA, IEC 62353 (VDE 0751-1) using separate IEC 60601 and AAMI Body
Model
Hand-held - Using purpose designed robust enclosure, the Rigel 288 is truly handheld, easy to hold single handed thus enabling one hand operation and navigation
Hand-held - Using purpose designed robust enclosure, the Rigel 288 is truly handheld, easy to hold single handed thus enabling one hand operation and navigation
Easy to use - A full graphic, monochrome LCD display (1/4 VGA minimum) in
combination with an integral alpha-numeric ABCD-key-board.
Easy to use - A full graphic, monochrome LCD display (1/4 VGA minimum) in
combination with an integral alpha-numeric ABCD-key-board.
Manual and Automatic test modes - Able to perform UTS (Unique Test Sequence)
and allows fully automatic, semi automatic and fully manual testing.
Manual and Automatic test modes - Able to perform UTS (Unique Test Sequence)
and allows fully automatic, semi automatic and fully manual testing.
User definable test routines - Users have the ability to amend the default programs
or create new programs by copying the preset test programs. Each program will have
a unique Identifier.
User definable test routines - Users have the ability to amend the default programs
or create new programs by copying the preset test programs. Each program will have
a unique Identifier.
Multiple Applied Part function - This feature gives the user the capability of testing
up to 10 individual Applied Parts from different Modules or classes e.g. BF and CF
class, or Bf ECG and Bf SPO2 module.
Multiple Applied Part function - This feature gives the user the capability of testing
up to 10 individual Applied Parts from different Modules or classes e.g. BF and CF
class, or Bf ECG and Bf SPO2 module.
Internal Asset management facilities - Store up to 10,000 test records, custom test
routines, visual inspections and performance tests and download to and from PC via
Blue Tooth Interface.
Internal Asset management facilities - Store up to 10,000 test records, custom test
routines, visual inspections and performance tests and download to and from PC via
Blue Tooth Interface.
1.3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Interfaces
1.3.
Alpha Numeric keyboard, Up / Down and Left / Right cursor control.
4 Programmable soft keys below display
Larger Green and Red key
Full graphic Monochrone LCD, blue with white backlit, 1/4 VGA
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
1)
2)
3)
4)
9
Interfaces
Alpha Numeric keyboard, Up / Down and Left / Right cursor control.
4 Programmable soft keys below display
Larger Green and Red key
Full graphic Monochrone LCD, blue with white backlit, 1/4 VGA
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
9
5) Blue Tooth Input / Output
6) EUT socket to meet local requirements
7) IEC input socket (IEC lead test)
8) Custom detachable mains cable inlet
9) 10 x Patient Applied part connector (B/Bf & Cf)
10) 4mm Earth bond probe socket (Green)
11) 4 mm Earth bond Auxiliary socket
12) RS232 connection
5) Blue Tooth Input / Output
6) EUT socket to meet local requirements
7) IEC input socket (IEC lead test)
8) Custom detachable mains cable inlet
9) 10 x Patient Applied part connector (B/Bf & Cf)
10) 4mm Earth bond probe socket (Green)
11) 4 mm Earth bond Auxiliary socket
12) RS232 connection
1.4.
1.4.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calibration Certificate
Carrying Case
Earth bond test probe with clip
Earth bond clip lead
Patient Applied part module
10 Applied part adaptors
Detachable 2 meter mains cable
Blue Tooth USB dongle
Electronic Instruction Manual
Removable ‘quick start’ card
1.5.
•
•
•
•
•
Rigel 288 includes:
Optional Accessories
Med-eBase PC Download software
BlueTooth Barcode scanner
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag System
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag Elite System
BlueTooth result printer (50mm)
1.6.
Calibration Certificate
Carrying Case
Earth bond test probe with clip
Earth bond clip lead
Patient Applied part module
10 Applied part adaptors
Detachable 2 meter mains cable
Blue Tooth USB dongle
Electronic Instruction Manual
Removable ‘quick start’ card
1.5.
•
•
•
•
•
(p/n 301A920)
(p/n 339A923)
(p/n 331A950)
(p/n 333A970)
(p/n 339A930)
Test ’n Tag Compatible
Rigel 288 includes:
Optional Accessories
Med-eBase PC Download software
BlueTooth Barcode scanner
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag System
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag Elite System
BlueTooth result printer (50mm)
1.6.
(p/n 301A920)
(p/n 339A923)
(p/n 331A950)
(p/n 333A970)
(p/n 339A930)
Test ’n Tag Compatible
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Elite system. Our Test ‘n
Tag systems allows you to print customised Thermal PASS / FAIL labels.
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Elite system. Our Test ‘n
Tag systems allows you to print customised Thermal PASS / FAIL labels.
The benefits of using the Test ‘n Tag printers are:
• Robust and durable labels
• Resistant to most solvents used in the medical sector
• Free opportunity to advertise your logo and company details or emergency
telephone number with every item you Test ‘n’ Tag.
• Automatic barcode generation to provide easy use of the barcode scanner thus
speeding up your test time.
The benefits of using the Test ‘n Tag printers are:
• Robust and durable labels
• Resistant to most solvents used in the medical sector
• Free opportunity to advertise your logo and company details or emergency
telephone number with every item you Test ‘n’ Tag.
• Automatic barcode generation to provide easy use of the barcode scanner thus
speeding up your test time.
The unique Test ‘n’ Tag label provides test status and retest due date, barcode and
asset ID number, and person conducting the test. For more information on using the
Test ‘n Tag printer, see section 4.
The unique Test ‘n’ Tag label provides test status and retest due date, barcode and
asset ID number, and person conducting the test. For more information on using the
Test ‘n Tag printer, see section 4.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
10
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5) Blue Tooth Input / Output
6) EUT socket to meet local requirements
7) IEC input socket (IEC lead test)
8) Custom detachable mains cable inlet
9) 10 x Patient Applied part connector (B/Bf & Cf)
10) 4mm Earth bond probe socket (Green)
11) 4 mm Earth bond Auxiliary socket
12) RS232 connection
5) Blue Tooth Input / Output
6) EUT socket to meet local requirements
7) IEC input socket (IEC lead test)
8) Custom detachable mains cable inlet
9) 10 x Patient Applied part connector (B/Bf & Cf)
10) 4mm Earth bond probe socket (Green)
11) 4 mm Earth bond Auxiliary socket
12) RS232 connection
1.4.
1.4.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Calibration Certificate
Carrying Case
Earth bond test probe with clip
Earth bond clip lead
Patient Applied part module
10 Applied part adaptors
Detachable 2 meter mains cable
Blue Tooth USB dongle
Electronic Instruction Manual
Removable ‘quick start’ card
1.5.
•
•
•
•
•
Rigel 288 includes:
Optional Accessories
Med-eBase PC Download software
BlueTooth Barcode scanner
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag System
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag Elite System
BlueTooth result printer (50mm)
1.6.
•
•
•
•
•
Test ’n Tag Compatible
Rigel 288 includes:
Calibration Certificate
Carrying Case
Earth bond test probe with clip
Earth bond clip lead
Patient Applied part module
10 Applied part adaptors
Detachable 2 meter mains cable
Blue Tooth USB dongle
Electronic Instruction Manual
Removable ‘quick start’ card
1.5.
(p/n 301A920)
(p/n 339A923)
(p/n 331A950)
(p/n 333A970)
(p/n 339A930)
10
Optional Accessories
Med-eBase PC Download software
BlueTooth Barcode scanner
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag System
BlueTooth Test ‘N’ Tag Elite System
BlueTooth result printer (50mm)
1.6.
(p/n 301A920)
(p/n 339A923)
(p/n 331A950)
(p/n 333A970)
(p/n 339A930)
Test ’n Tag Compatible
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Elite system. Our Test ‘n
Tag systems allows you to print customised Thermal PASS / FAIL labels.
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Elite system. Our Test ‘n
Tag systems allows you to print customised Thermal PASS / FAIL labels.
The benefits of using the Test ‘n Tag printers are:
• Robust and durable labels
• Resistant to most solvents used in the medical sector
• Free opportunity to advertise your logo and company details or emergency
telephone number with every item you Test ‘n’ Tag.
• Automatic barcode generation to provide easy use of the barcode scanner thus
speeding up your test time.
The benefits of using the Test ‘n Tag printers are:
• Robust and durable labels
• Resistant to most solvents used in the medical sector
• Free opportunity to advertise your logo and company details or emergency
telephone number with every item you Test ‘n’ Tag.
• Automatic barcode generation to provide easy use of the barcode scanner thus
speeding up your test time.
The unique Test ‘n’ Tag label provides test status and retest due date, barcode and
asset ID number, and person conducting the test. For more information on using the
Test ‘n Tag printer, see section 4.
The unique Test ‘n’ Tag label provides test status and retest due date, barcode and
asset ID number, and person conducting the test. For more information on using the
Test ‘n Tag printer, see section 4.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
10
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
10
1.7.
Unique use of ICONS
1.7.
Unique use of ICONS
The Rigel 288 features a hi resolution graphic back lit display which not only provides
highly visible and easy to follow menu structures but also allows the user to operate
the tester using intuitive icons to speed up their test routines.
The Rigel 288 features a hi resolution graphic back lit display which not only provides
highly visible and easy to follow menu structures but also allows the user to operate
the tester using intuitive icons to speed up their test routines.
Below are of some of the icons used in the Rigel 288:
Below are of some of the icons used in the Rigel 288:
Escape
OK – PASS
Escape
OK – PASS
Add
Print
Add
Print
Applied Parts
Less
Applied Parts
Less
Copy
Repeat
Copy
Repeat
Delete
Save
Delete
Save
Edit
Search
Edit
Search
Help
Settings
Help
Settings
Menu – List
Single Fault
Menu – List
Single Fault
Home
Shift
Home
Shift
New
Mute
New
Mute
Sound
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
1.7.
Sound
11
Unique use of ICONS
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
1.7.
11
Unique use of ICONS
The Rigel 288 features a hi resolution graphic back lit display which not only provides
highly visible and easy to follow menu structures but also allows the user to operate
the tester using intuitive icons to speed up their test routines.
The Rigel 288 features a hi resolution graphic back lit display which not only provides
highly visible and easy to follow menu structures but also allows the user to operate
the tester using intuitive icons to speed up their test routines.
Below are of some of the icons used in the Rigel 288:
Below are of some of the icons used in the Rigel 288:
Escape
OK – PASS
Escape
OK – PASS
Add
Print
Add
Print
Applied Parts
Less
Applied Parts
Less
Copy
Repeat
Copy
Repeat
Delete
Save
Delete
Save
Edit
Search
Edit
Search
Help
Settings
Help
Settings
Menu – List
Single Fault
Menu – List
Single Fault
Home
Shift
Home
Shift
New
Mute
New
Mute
Sound
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Sound
11
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
11
2. Logging on
2. Logging on
When switching on the Rigel 288, the user will be able to log-in to allow for specific
default user preferences and to provide traceability of test results. To increase the
security and protection of the user, a password can be set prior to using the Rigel 288.
See 3.6.3 for further details. The default password setting is OFF and the login screen
will not require a password. In case a user and password are set, the tester will default
to the last user / password.
When switching on the Rigel 288, the user will be able to log-in to allow for specific
default user preferences and to provide traceability of test results. To increase the
security and protection of the user, a password can be set prior to using the Rigel 288.
See 3.6.3 for further details. The default password setting is OFF and the login screen
will not require a password. In case a user and password are set, the tester will default
to the last user / password.
To change the user, use the drop down menu provided [<>] and select the new user. In
case a password is set for the new user, please enter the password (case sensitive).
To change the user, use the drop down menu provided [<>] and select the new user. In
case a password is set for the new user, please enter the password (case sensitive).
In case a password is lost and the unit is blocked, please call our helpdesk on:
+44 (0) 191 5878718 or contact your local distributor and quote the 8-digit code
(shown below the password field) and the serial number of the tester. A new password
will then be created. For security reasons, this new password can only be provided to
the email address of the original purchaser of the device.
In case a password is lost and the unit is blocked, please call our helpdesk on:
+44 (0) 191 5878718 or contact your local distributor and quote the 8-digit code
(shown below the password field) and the serial number of the tester. A new password
will then be created. For security reasons, this new password can only be provided to
the email address of the original purchaser of the device.
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow a user to customise test sequences and allow
default settings. This customisation can speed up testing by providing the user with
default manufacturer lists, model numbers, user text protocols, automatic printing
post-text and fault menus.
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow a user to customise test sequences and allow
default settings. This customisation can speed up testing by providing the user with
default manufacturer lists, model numbers, user text protocols, automatic printing
post-text and fault menus.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
12
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
12
2. Logging on
2. Logging on
When switching on the Rigel 288, the user will be able to log-in to allow for specific
default user preferences and to provide traceability of test results. To increase the
security and protection of the user, a password can be set prior to using the Rigel 288.
See 3.6.3 for further details. The default password setting is OFF and the login screen
will not require a password. In case a user and password are set, the tester will default
to the last user / password.
When switching on the Rigel 288, the user will be able to log-in to allow for specific
default user preferences and to provide traceability of test results. To increase the
security and protection of the user, a password can be set prior to using the Rigel 288.
See 3.6.3 for further details. The default password setting is OFF and the login screen
will not require a password. In case a user and password are set, the tester will default
to the last user / password.
To change the user, use the drop down menu provided [<>] and select the new user. In
case a password is set for the new user, please enter the password (case sensitive).
To change the user, use the drop down menu provided [<>] and select the new user. In
case a password is set for the new user, please enter the password (case sensitive).
In case a password is lost and the unit is blocked, please call our helpdesk on:
+44 (0) 191 5878718 or contact your local distributor and quote the 8-digit code
(shown below the password field) and the serial number of the tester. A new password
will then be created. For security reasons, this new password can only be provided to
the email address of the original purchaser of the device.
In case a password is lost and the unit is blocked, please call our helpdesk on:
+44 (0) 191 5878718 or contact your local distributor and quote the 8-digit code
(shown below the password field) and the serial number of the tester. A new password
will then be created. For security reasons, this new password can only be provided to
the email address of the original purchaser of the device.
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow a user to customise test sequences and allow
default settings. This customisation can speed up testing by providing the user with
default manufacturer lists, model numbers, user text protocols, automatic printing
post-text and fault menus.
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow a user to customise test sequences and allow
default settings. This customisation can speed up testing by providing the user with
default manufacturer lists, model numbers, user text protocols, automatic printing
post-text and fault menus.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
12
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
12
3. Setting-up your tester
3. Setting-up your tester
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow the user to customise the device to allow default
setting in order to speed up the testing such as, default lists of manufacturers, model
numbers, user test protocols, automatic printing following test, fault menu’s and so on.
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow the user to customise the device to allow default
setting in order to speed up the testing such as, default lists of manufacturers, model
numbers, user test protocols, automatic printing following test, fault menu’s and so on.
[F4]
All custom facilities can be found under the SETUP menu. Simply press the
from the home screen and select Setup from the menu.
[F4]
All custom facilities can be found under the SETUP menu. Simply press the
from the home screen and select Setup from the menu.
Hint: The underlined character acts as a short key to allow swift navigation through the
menu structure.
Hint: The underlined character acts as a short key to allow swift navigation through the
menu structure.
Options available
Options available
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
Systems Config
Blue Tooth Favourites
User admin
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
3.1.
Modify or create test sequences (see 3.1)
Generate 4-digit test routine short cuts (see 3.2)
Generate default list of variables (see 3.3)
Configure default test options (see 3.4)
Setup your Blue Tooth devices (see 3.5)
Setup users and preferences (see 3.6)
Manage the tester’s memory (see 3.7)
Defaults the tester to factory settings (see 3.8)
Test Sequences
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
Systems Config
Blue Tooth Favourites
User admin
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
3.1.
Modify or create test sequences (see 3.1)
Generate 4-digit test routine short cuts (see 3.2)
Generate default list of variables (see 3.3)
Configure default test options (see 3.4)
Setup your Blue Tooth devices (see 3.5)
Setup users and preferences (see 3.6)
Manage the tester’s memory (see 3.7)
Defaults the tester to factory settings (see 3.8)
Test Sequences
The Rigel 288 can be set-up to create new test sequences to meet local requirements
or to modify existing test sequences to meet personal preference.
The Rigel 288 can be set-up to create new test sequences to meet local requirements
or to modify existing test sequences to meet personal preference.
The preset Test Sequences are according to the applicable medical standard. Preset
test sequences cannot be changed by the user, however alterations are possible by
producing a copy of the default test sequence setting.
The preset Test Sequences are according to the applicable medical standard. Preset
test sequences cannot be changed by the user, however alterations are possible by
producing a copy of the default test sequence setting.
The total number of possible preset test sequences is 50 including 12 default test
sequences. Each sequence can be linked to a specific configuration of Applied Parts
The total number of possible preset test sequences is 50 including 12 default test
sequences. Each sequence can be linked to a specific configuration of Applied Parts
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
13
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
13
3. Setting-up your tester
3. Setting-up your tester
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow the user to customise the device to allow default
setting in order to speed up the testing such as, default lists of manufacturers, model
numbers, user test protocols, automatic printing following test, fault menu’s and so on.
The Rigel 288 is designed to allow the user to customise the device to allow default
setting in order to speed up the testing such as, default lists of manufacturers, model
numbers, user test protocols, automatic printing following test, fault menu’s and so on.
All custom facilities can be found under the SETUP menu. Simply press the
from the home screen and select Setup from the menu.
All custom facilities can be found under the SETUP menu. Simply press the
from the home screen and select Setup from the menu.
[F4]
[F4]
Hint: The underlined character acts as a short key to allow swift navigation through the
menu structure.
Hint: The underlined character acts as a short key to allow swift navigation through the
menu structure.
Options available
Options available
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
Systems Config
Blue Tooth Favourites
User admin
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
3.1.
Modify or create test sequences (see 3.1)
Generate 4-digit test routine short cuts (see 3.2)
Generate default list of variables (see 3.3)
Configure default test options (see 3.4)
Setup your Blue Tooth devices (see 3.5)
Setup users and preferences (see 3.6)
Manage the tester’s memory (see 3.7)
Defaults the tester to factory settings (see 3.8)
Test Sequences
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
Systems Config
Blue Tooth Favourites
User admin
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
3.1.
Modify or create test sequences (see 3.1)
Generate 4-digit test routine short cuts (see 3.2)
Generate default list of variables (see 3.3)
Configure default test options (see 3.4)
Setup your Blue Tooth devices (see 3.5)
Setup users and preferences (see 3.6)
Manage the tester’s memory (see 3.7)
Defaults the tester to factory settings (see 3.8)
Test Sequences
The Rigel 288 can be set-up to create new test sequences to meet local requirements
or to modify existing test sequences to meet personal preference.
The Rigel 288 can be set-up to create new test sequences to meet local requirements
or to modify existing test sequences to meet personal preference.
The preset Test Sequences are according to the applicable medical standard. Preset
test sequences cannot be changed by the user, however alterations are possible by
producing a copy of the default test sequence setting.
The preset Test Sequences are according to the applicable medical standard. Preset
test sequences cannot be changed by the user, however alterations are possible by
producing a copy of the default test sequence setting.
The total number of possible preset test sequences is 50 including 12 default test
sequences. Each sequence can be linked to a specific configuration of Applied Parts
The total number of possible preset test sequences is 50 including 12 default test
sequences. Each sequence can be linked to a specific configuration of Applied Parts
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
13
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
13
by designating a unique 4 digit Test Code (see 3.2) which can be entered prior to each
test as a short cut / menu bypass function.
3.1.1. User definable tests
by designating a unique 4 digit Test Code (see 3.2) which can be entered prior to each
test as a short cut / menu bypass function.
3.1.1. User definable tests
This feature gives the Rigel 288 the capability of recording user defined visual
inspections, checks or tests including measurements from SPO2, ECG, NIBP, Defib,
Infusion, Ventilation, Pressure etc.
This feature gives the Rigel 288 the capability of recording user defined visual
inspections, checks or tests including measurements from SPO2, ECG, NIBP, Defib,
Infusion, Ventilation, Pressure etc.
The input is text only as no measurements are performed by the Rigel 288 during these
tests. The user can enter questions or instructions followed by either a PASS/FAIL
result or alpha numeric input. Preset engineering units e.g. %, Joules, mmHg, PSI,
CmH2O etc are available.
The input is text only as no measurements are performed by the Rigel 288 during these
tests. The user can enter questions or instructions followed by either a PASS/FAIL
result or alpha numeric input. Preset engineering units e.g. %, Joules, mmHg, PSI,
CmH2O etc are available.
3.1.2. View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine.
3.1.2. View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine.
Preset test sequences cannot be deleted or changed by the user however, alterations
are possible by producing a copy of the default test sequence.
To enter the Test Sequences menu, click on
Sequences from the list and press
, followed by Setup. Select the Test
(F4).
Preset test sequences cannot be deleted or changed by the user however, alterations
are possible by producing a copy of the default test sequence.
To enter the Test Sequences menu, click on
Sequences from the list and press
The following overview is provided and shows the list of default and customised test
sequences availble. Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
14
by designating a unique 4 digit Test Code (see 3.2) which can be entered prior to each
test as a short cut / menu bypass function.
3.1.1. User definable tests
, followed by Setup. Select the Test
(F4).
The following overview is provided and shows the list of default and customised test
sequences availble. Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
14
by designating a unique 4 digit Test Code (see 3.2) which can be entered prior to each
test as a short cut / menu bypass function.
3.1.1. User definable tests
This feature gives the Rigel 288 the capability of recording user defined visual
inspections, checks or tests including measurements from SPO2, ECG, NIBP, Defib,
Infusion, Ventilation, Pressure etc.
This feature gives the Rigel 288 the capability of recording user defined visual
inspections, checks or tests including measurements from SPO2, ECG, NIBP, Defib,
Infusion, Ventilation, Pressure etc.
The input is text only as no measurements are performed by the Rigel 288 during these
tests. The user can enter questions or instructions followed by either a PASS/FAIL
result or alpha numeric input. Preset engineering units e.g. %, Joules, mmHg, PSI,
CmH2O etc are available.
The input is text only as no measurements are performed by the Rigel 288 during these
tests. The user can enter questions or instructions followed by either a PASS/FAIL
result or alpha numeric input. Preset engineering units e.g. %, Joules, mmHg, PSI,
CmH2O etc are available.
3.1.2. View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine.
3.1.2. View, Delete or Copy an existing Test Routine.
Preset test sequences cannot be deleted or changed by the user however, alterations
are possible by producing a copy of the default test sequence.
To enter the Test Sequences menu, click on
Sequences from the list and press
, followed by Setup. Select the Test
(F4).
To enter the Test Sequences menu, click on
Sequences from the list and press
The following overview is provided and shows the list of default and customised test
sequences availble. Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Preset test sequences cannot be deleted or changed by the user however, alterations
are possible by producing a copy of the default test sequence.
14
, followed by Setup. Select the Test
(F4).
The following overview is provided and shows the list of default and customised test
sequences availble. Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
14
From this menu, the user is able to View a test sequence by pressing the View button
(F4). Default test settings cannot be altered at any stage.
From this menu, the user is able to View a test sequence by pressing the View button
(F4). Default test settings cannot be altered at any stage.
To Copy, Delete or Print an existing or default test sequence, use the Up & Down
To Copy, Delete or Print an existing or default test sequence, use the Up & Down
arrow keys to highlight the test sequence and press the
arrow keys to highlight the test sequence and press the
button (F2).
button (F2).
Use the Up & Down Arrow keys to select the required action and press the
(F4) to confirm. Press Escape (F3) to cancel and return to previous screen.
Use the Up & Down Arrow keys to select the required action and press the
(F4) to confirm. Press Escape (F3) to cancel and return to previous screen.
Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix. All Copied test
Sequences can be edited. See 3.1.3 for more on editing test sequences.
Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix. All Copied test
Sequences can be edited. See 3.1.3 for more on editing test sequences.
Print Test Sequence will provide an overview of the Test Sequence on the Favourite
Blue Tooth Printer. See 3.5 for help on setting up Blue Tooth devices.
Print Test Sequence will provide an overview of the Test Sequence on the Favourite
Blue Tooth Printer. See 3.5 for help on setting up Blue Tooth devices.
Delete Sequence will remove the highlighted test sequence from the memory of the
Rigel 288.
Delete Sequence will remove the highlighted test sequence from the memory of the
Rigel 288.
Note: Default Test Sequences cannot be Deleted.
Note: Default Test Sequences cannot be Deleted.
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences
Preset test sequences cannot be modified by the user, however alterations are
possible by producing a copy of the default test setting (see 3.1.2).
Preset test sequences cannot be modified by the user, however alterations are
possible by producing a copy of the default test setting (see 3.1.2).
Non-default Test Sequences can be modified from the Test Sequences menu. When
Non-default Test Sequences can be modified from the Test Sequences menu. When
non-default Test Sequences are highlighted, the
screen.
(F4) will appear in the menu
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
15
non-default Test Sequences are highlighted, the
screen.
(F4) will appear in the menu
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
15
From this menu, the user is able to View a test sequence by pressing the View button
(F4). Default test settings cannot be altered at any stage.
From this menu, the user is able to View a test sequence by pressing the View button
(F4). Default test settings cannot be altered at any stage.
To Copy, Delete or Print an existing or default test sequence, use the Up & Down
To Copy, Delete or Print an existing or default test sequence, use the Up & Down
arrow keys to highlight the test sequence and press the
arrow keys to highlight the test sequence and press the
button (F2).
button (F2).
Use the Up & Down Arrow keys to select the required action and press the
(F4) to confirm. Press Escape (F3) to cancel and return to previous screen.
Use the Up & Down Arrow keys to select the required action and press the
(F4) to confirm. Press Escape (F3) to cancel and return to previous screen.
Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix. All Copied test
Sequences can be edited. See 3.1.3 for more on editing test sequences.
Copied Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix. All Copied test
Sequences can be edited. See 3.1.3 for more on editing test sequences.
Print Test Sequence will provide an overview of the Test Sequence on the Favourite
Blue Tooth Printer. See 3.5 for help on setting up Blue Tooth devices.
Print Test Sequence will provide an overview of the Test Sequence on the Favourite
Blue Tooth Printer. See 3.5 for help on setting up Blue Tooth devices.
Delete Sequence will remove the highlighted test sequence from the memory of the
Rigel 288.
Delete Sequence will remove the highlighted test sequence from the memory of the
Rigel 288.
Note: Default Test Sequences cannot be Deleted.
Note: Default Test Sequences cannot be Deleted.
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences
3.1.3
Modifying (Edit) Existing Test Sequences
Preset test sequences cannot be modified by the user, however alterations are
possible by producing a copy of the default test setting (see 3.1.2).
Preset test sequences cannot be modified by the user, however alterations are
possible by producing a copy of the default test setting (see 3.1.2).
Non-default Test Sequences can be modified from the Test Sequences menu. When
Non-default Test Sequences can be modified from the Test Sequences menu. When
non-default Test Sequences are highlighted, the
screen.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) will appear in the menu
15
non-default Test Sequences are highlighted, the
screen.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) will appear in the menu
15
Pressing the
below;
button (F4) will open the Test Sequence for Editing as shown
To change the Name and or Class of the Test Sequence, press the
and enter the Name and or Class required.
Button (F4)
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific characters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Pressing the
below;
16
Button (F4)
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific characters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F4) will open the Test Sequence for Editing as shown
To change the Name and or Class of the Test Sequence, press the
and enter the Name and or Class required.
Button (F4)
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific characters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
button (F4) will open the Test Sequence for Editing as shown
To change the Name and or Class of the Test Sequence, press the
and enter the Name and or Class required.
Pressing the
below;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Pressing the
below;
16
button (F4) will open the Test Sequence for Editing as shown
To change the Name and or Class of the Test Sequence, press the
and enter the Name and or Class required.
Button (F4)
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific characters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
16
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
16
To Delete a character, press the
button (F2)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
To Delete a character, press the
button (F3)
To confirm the entry, press the
button (F4)
Confirm the changes with the
(F4).
button (F3) or cancel using the
button (F2)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
button
button (F3)
To confirm the entry, press the
button (F4)
Confirm the changes with the
(F4).
button (F3) or cancel using the
button
To Insert a new test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and press the
Insert button (F1)
To Insert a new test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and press the
Insert button (F1)
To Delete an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
To Delete an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
press the
press the
button (F2)
To go back to the previous menu, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys
and press the
button (F3)
press the
Button (F4)
17
Button (F4)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F2)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
button (F3)
To modify an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
press the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
To Delete a character, press the
To go back to the previous menu, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys
and press the
To modify an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
button (F2)
To Delete a character, press the
button (F3)
To confirm the entry, press the
button (F4)
Confirm the changes with the
(F4).
button (F3) or cancel using the
button (F2)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
button
17
button (F3)
To confirm the entry, press the
button (F4)
Confirm the changes with the
(F4).
button (F3) or cancel using the
button
To Insert a new test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and press the
Insert button (F1)
To Insert a new test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and press the
Insert button (F1)
To Delete an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
To Delete an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
press the
press the
button (F2)
To go back to the previous menu, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys
and press the
button (F3)
press the
Button (F4)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
To go back to the previous menu, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys
and press the
To modify an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
button (F3)
To modify an individual test, highlight the test using the Up & Down arrow keys and
press the
17
button (F2)
Button (F4)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
17
3.1.3. Edit individual Test
3.1.3. Edit individual Test
Press the
button (F4) as shown above. The sub menu will allow you to alter the
settings for; Test duration, Mains Limit, Single Fault Limit, Neutral Open*, Earth Open*,
Mains Reversal*.
Press the
button (F4) as shown above. The sub menu will allow you to alter the
settings for; Test duration, Mains Limit, Single Fault Limit, Neutral Open*, Earth Open*,
Mains Reversal*.
* The default Test sequences will have the appropiate Single Fault Conditions set to
meet the Standard Requirements. For specifc use, Single Fault Conditions could be
de-activated by selecting the drop down box using the up and down keys and highlight
the drop down box. Change the content using the left and right keys.
* The default Test sequences will have the appropiate Single Fault Conditions set to
meet the Standard Requirements. For specifc use, Single Fault Conditions could be
de-activated by selecting the drop down box using the up and down keys and highlight
the drop down box. Change the content using the left and right keys.
Highlight the required field using the up and down keys. To change the content either
use the left and right keys or use the keypad to enter the correct data. To Delete the
Highlight the required field using the up and down keys. To change the content either
use the left and right keys or use the keypad to enter the correct data. To Delete the
field content, press the
button as shown below.
When the right settings have been achieved, press the
changes or press
field content, press the
button (F4) to save the
(F3) to return to the previous menu without changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
18
3.1.3. Edit individual Test
button as shown below.
When the right settings have been achieved, press the
changes or press
button (F4) to save the
(F3) to return to the previous menu without changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
18
3.1.3. Edit individual Test
Press the
button (F4) as shown above. The sub menu will allow you to alter the
settings for; Test duration, Mains Limit, Single Fault Limit, Neutral Open*, Earth Open*,
Mains Reversal*.
Press the
button (F4) as shown above. The sub menu will allow you to alter the
settings for; Test duration, Mains Limit, Single Fault Limit, Neutral Open*, Earth Open*,
Mains Reversal*.
* The default Test sequences will have the appropiate Single Fault Conditions set to
meet the Standard Requirements. For specifc use, Single Fault Conditions could be
de-activated by selecting the drop down box using the up and down keys and highlight
the drop down box. Change the content using the left and right keys.
* The default Test sequences will have the appropiate Single Fault Conditions set to
meet the Standard Requirements. For specifc use, Single Fault Conditions could be
de-activated by selecting the drop down box using the up and down keys and highlight
the drop down box. Change the content using the left and right keys.
Highlight the required field using the up and down keys. To change the content either
use the left and right keys or use the keypad to enter the correct data. To Delete the
Highlight the required field using the up and down keys. To change the content either
use the left and right keys or use the keypad to enter the correct data. To Delete the
field content, press the
button as shown below.
When the right settings have been achieved, press the
changes or press
field content, press the
button (F4) to save the
(F3) to return to the previous menu without changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
18
button as shown below.
When the right settings have been achieved, press the
changes or press
button (F4) to save the
(F3) to return to the previous menu without changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
18
Repeat this action for every test that requires editing. Once all the requires tests are
Repeat this action for every test that requires editing. Once all the requires tests are
programmed, press
programmed, press
(F3) to exit.
3.1.4. Insert an individual safety test
(F3) to exit.
3.1.4. Insert an individual safety test
To insert an individual safety test we use the up and down keys to highlight the
position where a new test needs inserting and press the Insert button (F1) from the
menu below.
To insert an individual safety test we use the up and down keys to highlight the
position where a new test needs inserting and press the Insert button (F1) from the
menu below.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety and inspection tests. Activate the drop down box using the left key and
or scroll through the available tests using the up and down keys.
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety and inspection tests. Activate the drop down box using the left key and
or scroll through the available tests using the up and down keys.
Once the desired test has been highlighted, confirm using the OK button (F4) and
Once the desired test has been highlighted, confirm using the OK button (F4) and
finally confirm to insert into the test Sequence. Pressing the
return to the previous screen without changes being made.
button (F3) will
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
19
finally confirm to insert into the test Sequence. Pressing the
return to the previous screen without changes being made.
button (F3) will
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
19
Repeat this action for every test that requires editing. Once all the requires tests are
Repeat this action for every test that requires editing. Once all the requires tests are
programmed, press
programmed, press
(F3) to exit.
3.1.4. Insert an individual safety test
(F3) to exit.
3.1.4. Insert an individual safety test
To insert an individual safety test we use the up and down keys to highlight the
position where a new test needs inserting and press the Insert button (F1) from the
menu below.
To insert an individual safety test we use the up and down keys to highlight the
position where a new test needs inserting and press the Insert button (F1) from the
menu below.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety and inspection tests. Activate the drop down box using the left key and
or scroll through the available tests using the up and down keys.
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety and inspection tests. Activate the drop down box using the left key and
or scroll through the available tests using the up and down keys.
Once the desired test has been highlighted, confirm using the OK button (F4) and
Once the desired test has been highlighted, confirm using the OK button (F4) and
finally confirm to insert into the test Sequence. Pressing the
return to the previous screen without changes being made.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F3) will
19
finally confirm to insert into the test Sequence. Pressing the
return to the previous screen without changes being made.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F3) will
19
The individual test has now been inserted and can be edited as described in 3.1.4
The individual test has now been inserted and can be edited as described in 3.1.4
Further electrical safety tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps
described herein.
Further electrical safety tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps
described herein.
Proceed with non-electrical safety tests as described in the following or save the new
Test Sequence by following the steps below.
Proceed with non-electrical safety tests as described in the following or save the new
Test Sequence by following the steps below.
3.1.5. Insert a non-electrical safety test
3.1.5. Insert a non-electrical safety test
Non-electrical safety tests are intended to allow the user to capture additional
information either prior to or after a safety test is completed. Such information could
indicate the performance of the Medical Device (eg NIBP reading, Defibrillator Energy,
Flow rate on Infusion device, SPO2 reading etc).
Non-electrical safety tests are intended to allow the user to capture additional
information either prior to or after a safety test is completed. Such information could
indicate the performance of the Medical Device (eg NIBP reading, Defibrillator Energy,
Flow rate on Infusion device, SPO2 reading etc).
This feature can also be used to instruct the user to inspect certain criteria (eg. Labels,
software version, certain damage or upgrades) prior to a safety test as part of the
Visual Inspection. To create customised visual inspections, use the insert Custom Test
function using the instructions below and set the engineering units to blank.
This feature can also be used to instruct the user to inspect certain criteria (eg. Labels,
software version, certain damage or upgrades) prior to a safety test as part of the
Visual Inspection. To create customised visual inspections, use the insert Custom Test
function using the instructions below and set the engineering units to blank.
Hint: Create a unique range of visual tests or instructions by creating a new test
sequence (see 3.1.7) and select Custom Test as the nature of the test. This will
create a unique test sequence which can be linked to other Test Sequences or
Applied Part Configurations using Test Codes. See 3.2 for more information. This
allows the user to insert default customised visual checks or perfomance tests
(eg when testing NIBP monitors, Defibrillators etc)
Hint: Create a unique range of visual tests or instructions by creating a new test
sequence (see 3.1.7) and select Custom Test as the nature of the test. This will
create a unique test sequence which can be linked to other Test Sequences or
Applied Part Configurations using Test Codes. See 3.2 for more information. This
allows the user to insert default customised visual checks or perfomance tests
(eg when testing NIBP monitors, Defibrillators etc)
The maximum number of characters in the test description or instruction is 255.
The maximum number of characters in the test description or instruction is 255.
To insert a non-electrical safety test, highlight the place where a new test needs
inserting using the up and down keys and press the Insert button (F1) from the menu
below.
To insert a non-electrical safety test, highlight the place where a new test needs
inserting using the up and down keys and press the Insert button (F1) from the menu
below.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
20
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
20
The individual test has now been inserted and can be edited as described in 3.1.4
The individual test has now been inserted and can be edited as described in 3.1.4
Further electrical safety tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps
described herein.
Further electrical safety tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps
described herein.
Proceed with non-electrical safety tests as described in the following or save the new
Test Sequence by following the steps below.
Proceed with non-electrical safety tests as described in the following or save the new
Test Sequence by following the steps below.
3.1.5. Insert a non-electrical safety test
3.1.5. Insert a non-electrical safety test
Non-electrical safety tests are intended to allow the user to capture additional
information either prior to or after a safety test is completed. Such information could
indicate the performance of the Medical Device (eg NIBP reading, Defibrillator Energy,
Flow rate on Infusion device, SPO2 reading etc).
Non-electrical safety tests are intended to allow the user to capture additional
information either prior to or after a safety test is completed. Such information could
indicate the performance of the Medical Device (eg NIBP reading, Defibrillator Energy,
Flow rate on Infusion device, SPO2 reading etc).
This feature can also be used to instruct the user to inspect certain criteria (eg. Labels,
software version, certain damage or upgrades) prior to a safety test as part of the
Visual Inspection. To create customised visual inspections, use the insert Custom Test
function using the instructions below and set the engineering units to blank.
This feature can also be used to instruct the user to inspect certain criteria (eg. Labels,
software version, certain damage or upgrades) prior to a safety test as part of the
Visual Inspection. To create customised visual inspections, use the insert Custom Test
function using the instructions below and set the engineering units to blank.
Hint: Create a unique range of visual tests or instructions by creating a new test
sequence (see 3.1.7) and select Custom Test as the nature of the test. This will
create a unique test sequence which can be linked to other Test Sequences or
Applied Part Configurations using Test Codes. See 3.2 for more information. This
allows the user to insert default customised visual checks or perfomance tests
(eg when testing NIBP monitors, Defibrillators etc)
Hint: Create a unique range of visual tests or instructions by creating a new test
sequence (see 3.1.7) and select Custom Test as the nature of the test. This will
create a unique test sequence which can be linked to other Test Sequences or
Applied Part Configurations using Test Codes. See 3.2 for more information. This
allows the user to insert default customised visual checks or perfomance tests
(eg when testing NIBP monitors, Defibrillators etc)
The maximum number of characters in the test description or instruction is 255.
The maximum number of characters in the test description or instruction is 255.
To insert a non-electrical safety test, highlight the place where a new test needs
inserting using the up and down keys and press the Insert button (F1) from the menu
below.
To insert a non-electrical safety test, highlight the place where a new test needs
inserting using the up and down keys and press the Insert button (F1) from the menu
below.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
20
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
20
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety tests and inspection available. Activate the drop down box using the
left key and select the Custom Test option.
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety tests and inspection available. Activate the drop down box using the
left key and select the Custom Test option.
button (F4). The following menu will define the nature of the
Confirm using the
non-electrical safety test (eg Equipment performance check at the end of a safety test).
button (F4). The following menu will define the nature of the
Confirm using the
non-electrical safety test (eg Equipment performance check at the end of a safety test).
Use the drop down box to choose a preset instruction and engineering unit or simply
type in the boxes provided. Newly entered data will be added to the drop down box on
a first come first serve basis.
Use the drop down box to choose a preset instruction and engineering unit or simply
type in the boxes provided. Newly entered data will be added to the drop down box on
a first come first serve basis.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
21
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
21
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety tests and inspection available. Activate the drop down box using the
left key and select the Custom Test option.
Once the Insert button (F1) has been pressed, a drop down box will appear with all
available safety tests and inspection available. Activate the drop down box using the
left key and select the Custom Test option.
button (F4). The following menu will define the nature of the
Confirm using the
non-electrical safety test (eg Equipment performance check at the end of a safety test).
button (F4). The following menu will define the nature of the
Confirm using the
non-electrical safety test (eg Equipment performance check at the end of a safety test).
Use the drop down box to choose a preset instruction and engineering unit or simply
type in the boxes provided. Newly entered data will be added to the drop down box on
a first come first serve basis.
Use the drop down box to choose a preset instruction and engineering unit or simply
type in the boxes provided. Newly entered data will be added to the drop down box on
a first come first serve basis.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
21
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
21
To insert the new Custom Test, press the
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3) and return to the previous screen without changes being made.
To insert the new Custom Test, press the
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3) and return to the previous screen without changes being made.
Further tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps described herein.
Further tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps described herein.
button. If the Escape button
Save the changes for future use by pressing the
(F3) is pressed, the Rigel 288 will return to the previous meny without changes being
made.
button. If the Escape button
Save the changes for future use by pressing the
(F3) is pressed, the Rigel 288 will return to the previous meny without changes being
made.
3.1.6. Create a new Test Sequence
3.1.6. Create a new Test Sequence
To create a new Test Sequence, enter the Menu button (F4) from the home screen,
select Setup followed by Test Sequences from the menu.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
To insert the new Custom Test, press the
22
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3) and return to the previous screen without changes being made.
To create a new Test Sequence, enter the Menu button (F4) from the home screen,
select Setup followed by Test Sequences from the menu.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
To insert the new Custom Test, press the
22
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3) and return to the previous screen without changes being made.
Further tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps described herein.
Further tests can be inserted or deleted by following the steps described herein.
button. If the Escape button
Save the changes for future use by pressing the
(F3) is pressed, the Rigel 288 will return to the previous meny without changes being
made.
button. If the Escape button
Save the changes for future use by pressing the
(F3) is pressed, the Rigel 288 will return to the previous meny without changes being
made.
3.1.6. Create a new Test Sequence
3.1.6. Create a new Test Sequence
To create a new Test Sequence, enter the Menu button (F4) from the home screen,
select Setup followed by Test Sequences from the menu.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
22
To create a new Test Sequence, enter the Menu button (F4) from the home screen,
select Setup followed by Test Sequences from the menu.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
22
The following screen displays the list of default and customised tests available. Copied
Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
The following screen displays the list of default and customised tests available. Copied
Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
From this menu, the user is able to create a new Test Sequence by pressing the
From this menu, the user is able to create a new Test Sequence by pressing the
button (F1).
button (F1).
The following menu allows the user to enter a dedicated Test Sequence name, Test
Standard (IEC 60601-1, IEC 62353, AAMI, NFPA, Customer test, VDE 0701/0702) and
Test Class (ie Class 1, 2 or None).
The following menu allows the user to enter a dedicated Test Sequence name, Test
Standard (IEC 60601-1, IEC 62353, AAMI, NFPA, Customer test, VDE 0701/0702) and
Test Class (ie Class 1, 2 or None).
Use up, down, left and right keys change the Test Standard and Test Class.
Use up, down, left and right keys change the Test Standard and Test Class.
Note that when choosing any of the standards other than –NONE-, all applicable
individual tests will be activated and are available for modification. To modify a Test
Sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
Note that when choosing any of the standards other than –NONE-, all applicable
individual tests will be activated and are available for modification. To modify a Test
Sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
When chosing Test –None-, the Test Sequence will only be set to an Inspection. Refer
to 3.1.6 for further details.
When chosing Test –None-, the Test Sequence will only be set to an Inspection. Refer
to 3.1.6 for further details.
When the text box is activated and text is entered, function keys F1
When the text box is activated and text is entered, function keys F1
and F2
and F2
appear automatically. In this instance ‘customer test 1’ has been created as
Test Name, with Class 1 and to Test Standard IEC 62353.
appear automatically. In this instance ‘customer test 1’ has been created as
Test Name, with Class 1 and to Test Standard IEC 62353.
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific charaters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific charaters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
23
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
23
The following screen displays the list of default and customised tests available. Copied
Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
The following screen displays the list of default and customised tests available. Copied
Test Sequences will appear in the list with an *pre-fix.
From this menu, the user is able to create a new Test Sequence by pressing the
From this menu, the user is able to create a new Test Sequence by pressing the
button (F1).
button (F1).
The following menu allows the user to enter a dedicated Test Sequence name, Test
Standard (IEC 60601-1, IEC 62353, AAMI, NFPA, Customer test, VDE 0701/0702) and
Test Class (ie Class 1, 2 or None).
The following menu allows the user to enter a dedicated Test Sequence name, Test
Standard (IEC 60601-1, IEC 62353, AAMI, NFPA, Customer test, VDE 0701/0702) and
Test Class (ie Class 1, 2 or None).
Use up, down, left and right keys change the Test Standard and Test Class.
Use up, down, left and right keys change the Test Standard and Test Class.
Note that when choosing any of the standards other than –NONE-, all applicable
individual tests will be activated and are available for modification. To modify a Test
Sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
Note that when choosing any of the standards other than –NONE-, all applicable
individual tests will be activated and are available for modification. To modify a Test
Sequence, please refer to 3.1.3.
When chosing Test –None-, the Test Sequence will only be set to an Inspection. Refer
to 3.1.6 for further details.
When chosing Test –None-, the Test Sequence will only be set to an Inspection. Refer
to 3.1.6 for further details.
When the text box is activated and text is entered, function keys F1
When the text box is activated and text is entered, function keys F1
and F2
and F2
appear automatically. In this instance ‘customer test 1’ has been created as
Test Name, with Class 1 and to Test Standard IEC 62353.
appear automatically. In this instance ‘customer test 1’ has been created as
Test Name, with Class 1 and to Test Standard IEC 62353.
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific charaters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
To change to upper or lower case or use language specific charaters, press the
button (F1) and select the required entry.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
23
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
23
To Delete a character, press the
button (F2)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
To confirm the entry, press the
To Delete a character, press the
button (F3)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
button (F4)
To confirm the entry, press the
Next step is to save the name of the newly create Test Name, by pressing the OK
button (F4). Pressing the
without changes.
button (F2)
key (F3) would return to the Test Sequence menu
button (F3)
button (F4)
Next step is to save the name of the newly create Test Name, by pressing the OK
button (F4). Pressing the
without changes.
key (F3) would return to the Test Sequence menu
The newly created Test Name now appears in the Test Sequence menu and can be
The newly created Test Name now appears in the Test Sequence menu and can be
modified to include the required individual tests. Press the
the sequence for editing.
modified to include the required individual tests. Press the
the sequence for editing.
button (F4) to open
button (F4) to open
Once the Test Sequence has been opened, individual tests can be inserted by
highlighting the place where a new test needs inserting using the up and down keys.
Once the Test Sequence has been opened, individual tests can be inserted by
highlighting the place where a new test needs inserting using the up and down keys.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3
3.2.
Test Codes
3.2.
Test Codes
Test codes can be used to create a 4-digit ‘short cut’ code in order to group custom
and or pre-set test(s), Applied Part configurations and test setup in either Automatic or
Semi Automatic mode. See section 4.1 for Automatic vs Semi Automatic testing.
Test codes can be used to create a 4-digit ‘short cut’ code in order to group custom
and or pre-set test(s), Applied Part configurations and test setup in either Automatic or
Semi Automatic mode. See section 4.1 for Automatic vs Semi Automatic testing.
For example, a specific brand or make of patient monitor is PC based, has a start-up
time of 1 minute and requires a specific Visual Inspection followed by a Semi
Automatic (see 4.1.1) Electrical Safety Test and Functional Test sequence (see 3.1 for
more information on various Test Sequences). In addition the patient monitor has a
specific configuration of Applied Parts. All this information can be grouped under a 4-
For example, a specific brand or make of patient monitor is PC based, has a start-up
time of 1 minute and requires a specific Visual Inspection followed by a Semi
Automatic (see 4.1.1) Electrical Safety Test and Functional Test sequence (see 3.1 for
more information on various Test Sequences). In addition the patient monitor has a
specific configuration of Applied Parts. All this information can be grouped under a 4-
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
To Delete a character, press the
button (F2)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
To confirm the entry, press the
24
To Delete a character, press the
button (F3)
button (F4)
To confirm the entry, press the
key (F3) would return to the Test Sequence menu
24
button (F2)
To return to the previous menu without changes, press the
Next step is to save the name of the newly create Test Name, by pressing the OK
button (F4). Pressing the
without changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F3)
button (F4)
Next step is to save the name of the newly create Test Name, by pressing the OK
button (F4). Pressing the
without changes.
key (F3) would return to the Test Sequence menu
The newly created Test Name now appears in the Test Sequence menu and can be
The newly created Test Name now appears in the Test Sequence menu and can be
modified to include the required individual tests. Press the
the sequence for editing.
modified to include the required individual tests. Press the
the sequence for editing.
button (F4) to open
button (F4) to open
Once the Test Sequence has been opened, individual tests can be inserted by
highlighting the place where a new test needs inserting using the up and down keys.
Once the Test Sequence has been opened, individual tests can be inserted by
highlighting the place where a new test needs inserting using the up and down keys.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
Note; Tests will be inserted before the highlighted position not after.
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3
To modify a test sequence, please refer to 3.1.3
3.2.
Test Codes
3.2.
Test Codes
Test codes can be used to create a 4-digit ‘short cut’ code in order to group custom
and or pre-set test(s), Applied Part configurations and test setup in either Automatic or
Semi Automatic mode. See section 4.1 for Automatic vs Semi Automatic testing.
Test codes can be used to create a 4-digit ‘short cut’ code in order to group custom
and or pre-set test(s), Applied Part configurations and test setup in either Automatic or
Semi Automatic mode. See section 4.1 for Automatic vs Semi Automatic testing.
For example, a specific brand or make of patient monitor is PC based, has a start-up
time of 1 minute and requires a specific Visual Inspection followed by a Semi
Automatic (see 4.1.1) Electrical Safety Test and Functional Test sequence (see 3.1 for
more information on various Test Sequences). In addition the patient monitor has a
specific configuration of Applied Parts. All this information can be grouped under a 4-
For example, a specific brand or make of patient monitor is PC based, has a start-up
time of 1 minute and requires a specific Visual Inspection followed by a Semi
Automatic (see 4.1.1) Electrical Safety Test and Functional Test sequence (see 3.1 for
more information on various Test Sequences). In addition the patient monitor has a
specific configuration of Applied Parts. All this information can be grouped under a 4-
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
24
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
24
digit Test Code and will speed up the tester setup significantly. Once the 4-digit code
is entered in the (Semi) Automatic Test, the Rigel 288 is preset with all test settings
applicable to the device under test.
3.2.1. Create New Test Codes
digit Test Code and will speed up the tester setup significantly. Once the 4-digit code
is entered in the (Semi) Automatic Test, the Rigel 288 is preset with all test settings
applicable to the device under test.
3.2.1. Create New Test Codes
To create a Test Code, press the
button (F4) from the home screen, select Setup
from the menu and select Test Codes from the list as shown below.
To create a Test Code, press the
button (F4) from the home screen, select Setup
from the menu and select Test Codes from the list as shown below.
button (F4) to select Test Codes. Press the
Press the
return to the Home screen.
button (F4) to select Test Codes. Press the
Press the
return to the Home screen.
button (F3) to
The following screen displays the initial menu in which New Test Codes can be created
button
(F1), existing Test Codes can be Edited (F4) or Deleted (F2). Press the
(F3) to go back to the Home screen.
Press the
button (F1). This will provide you with the first Test Code, TC01.
Note that Test Codes require a 4-digit number and as such, the name MUST be
changed to a 4-digit number before it can be used.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
25
The following screen displays the initial menu in which New Test Codes can be created
3.2.1. Create New Test Codes
button
(F1), existing Test Codes can be Edited (F4) or Deleted (F2). Press the
(F3) to go back to the Home screen.
Press the
button (F1). This will provide you with the first Test Code, TC01.
Note that Test Codes require a 4-digit number and as such, the name MUST be
changed to a 4-digit number before it can be used.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
digit Test Code and will speed up the tester setup significantly. Once the 4-digit code
is entered in the (Semi) Automatic Test, the Rigel 288 is preset with all test settings
applicable to the device under test.
button (F3) to
25
digit Test Code and will speed up the tester setup significantly. Once the 4-digit code
is entered in the (Semi) Automatic Test, the Rigel 288 is preset with all test settings
applicable to the device under test.
3.2.1. Create New Test Codes
To create a Test Code, press the
button (F4) from the home screen, select Setup
from the menu and select Test Codes from the list as shown below.
To create a Test Code, press the
button (F4) from the home screen, select Setup
from the menu and select Test Codes from the list as shown below.
button (F4) to select Test Codes. Press the
Press the
return to the Home screen.
button (F4) to select Test Codes. Press the
Press the
return to the Home screen.
button (F3) to
button (F3) to
The following screen displays the initial menu in which New Test Codes can be created
The following screen displays the initial menu in which New Test Codes can be created
(F1), existing Test Codes can be Edited (F4) or Deleted (F2). Press the
(F3) to go back to the Home screen.
(F1), existing Test Codes can be Edited (F4) or Deleted (F2). Press the
(F3) to go back to the Home screen.
Press the
button
button (F1). This will provide you with the first Test Code, TC01.
Note that Test Codes require a 4-digit number and as such, the name MUST be
changed to a 4-digit number before it can be used.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
25
Press the
button
button (F1). This will provide you with the first Test Code, TC01.
Note that Test Codes require a 4-digit number and as such, the name MUST be
changed to a 4-digit number before it can be used.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
25
The first Test Code has now been made available but requires a unique 4-digit code,
followed by a number of functions / configurations to be grouped.
The first Test Code has now been made available but requires a unique 4-digit code,
followed by a number of functions / configurations to be grouped.
Press the
Press the
button (F4) to configure the Test Code.
button (F4) to configure the Test Code.
button (F4) to allocate a unique 4-digit code and or to configure the
Press the
Applied Part setup and test mode to Semi or Full Automatic.
button (F4) to allocate a unique 4-digit code and or to configure the
Press the
Applied Part setup and test mode to Semi or Full Automatic.
Enter a 4-digit Test Code, in this example 1234, and use up. Down. Left and right keys
to select either Semi Automatic or Automatic. (see 4.1)
Enter a 4-digit Test Code, in this example 1234, and use up. Down. Left and right keys
to select either Semi Automatic or Automatic. (see 4.1)
3.2.2. Configuring the Applied Part Module
To configure the Applied Part settings, press the
3.2.2. Configuring the Applied Part Module
button (F1)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
To configure the Applied Part settings, press the
26
button (F1)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
26
The first Test Code has now been made available but requires a unique 4-digit code,
followed by a number of functions / configurations to be grouped.
The first Test Code has now been made available but requires a unique 4-digit code,
followed by a number of functions / configurations to be grouped.
Press the
Press the
button (F4) to configure the Test Code.
button (F4) to configure the Test Code.
button (F4) to allocate a unique 4-digit code and or to configure the
Press the
Applied Part setup and test mode to Semi or Full Automatic.
button (F4) to allocate a unique 4-digit code and or to configure the
Press the
Applied Part setup and test mode to Semi or Full Automatic.
Enter a 4-digit Test Code, in this example 1234, and use up. Down. Left and right keys
to select either Semi Automatic or Automatic. (see 4.1)
Enter a 4-digit Test Code, in this example 1234, and use up. Down. Left and right keys
to select either Semi Automatic or Automatic. (see 4.1)
3.2.2. Configuring the Applied Part Module
To configure the Applied Part settings, press the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
3.2.2. Configuring the Applied Part Module
button (F1)
To configure the Applied Part settings, press the
26
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F1)
26
The following screen presents a default setup for:
The following screen presents a default setup for:
10 x type CF (1..10)
10 x type CF (1..10)
The numbers on the left 1…10 define the Applied Part number, the numbers in each
line (eg 1-3) define the number of Patient Connections within that Applied Part.
Each Applied Part can also be given a name to increase the traceability.
The numbers on the left 1…10 define the Applied Part number, the numbers in each
line (eg 1-3) define the number of Patient Connections within that Applied Part.
Each Applied Part can also be given a name to increase the traceability.
To change the default settings, highlight the Applied Part that requires modification or
To change the default settings, highlight the Applied Part that requires modification or
configuration and press the
configuration and press the
button (F2).
button (F2).
In this example we change Applied Part 1 to be a 5-lead ECG type CF and Applied
Parts 2 to be Defibrillator Pads BF (2). Applied Parts 3 will be deleted.
In this example we change Applied Part 1 to be a 5-lead ECG type CF and Applied
Parts 2 to be Defibrillator Pads BF (2). Applied Parts 3 will be deleted.
Highlight Applied Part 1 and press the
Highlight Applied Part 1 and press the
button (F2)
button (F2)
Edit the first line or use the up, down, left and right keys to select from a list of default
names. Any new name entered will be added to the default list for future reference.
Edit the first line or use the up, down, left and right keys to select from a list of default
names. Any new name entered will be added to the default list for future reference.
Note; A maximum of 20 Applied Parts names can be held within the default list.
Any additional entry will replace an entry on a first in first out basis.
Note; A maximum of 20 Applied Parts names can be held within the default list.
Any additional entry will replace an entry on a first in first out basis.
Use up, down, left and right keys to set AP-type to CF and Patient Connections to 5
Use up, down, left and right keys to set AP-type to CF and Patient Connections to 5
Below presents the AP Setup screen with the required changes.
Below presents the AP Setup screen with the required changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
27
The following screen presents a default setup for:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
27
The following screen presents a default setup for:
10 x type CF (1..10)
10 x type CF (1..10)
The numbers on the left 1…10 define the Applied Part number, the numbers in each
line (eg 1-3) define the number of Patient Connections within that Applied Part.
Each Applied Part can also be given a name to increase the traceability.
The numbers on the left 1…10 define the Applied Part number, the numbers in each
line (eg 1-3) define the number of Patient Connections within that Applied Part.
Each Applied Part can also be given a name to increase the traceability.
To change the default settings, highlight the Applied Part that requires modification or
To change the default settings, highlight the Applied Part that requires modification or
configuration and press the
configuration and press the
button (F2).
button (F2).
In this example we change Applied Part 1 to be a 5-lead ECG type CF and Applied
Parts 2 to be Defibrillator Pads BF (2). Applied Parts 3 will be deleted.
In this example we change Applied Part 1 to be a 5-lead ECG type CF and Applied
Parts 2 to be Defibrillator Pads BF (2). Applied Parts 3 will be deleted.
Highlight Applied Part 1 and press the
Highlight Applied Part 1 and press the
button (F2)
button (F2)
Edit the first line or use the up, down, left and right keys to select from a list of default
names. Any new name entered will be added to the default list for future reference.
Edit the first line or use the up, down, left and right keys to select from a list of default
names. Any new name entered will be added to the default list for future reference.
Note; A maximum of 20 Applied Parts names can be held within the default list.
Any additional entry will replace an entry on a first in first out basis.
Note; A maximum of 20 Applied Parts names can be held within the default list.
Any additional entry will replace an entry on a first in first out basis.
Use up, down, left and right keys to set AP-type to CF and Patient Connections to 5
Use up, down, left and right keys to set AP-type to CF and Patient Connections to 5
Below presents the AP Setup screen with the required changes.
Below presents the AP Setup screen with the required changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
27
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
27
Confirm with the
button (F4) or exit using the
Highlight Applied Part 2 and press the
button (F3).
Confirm with the
button (F2)
Highlight Applied Part 2 and press the
Repeat the actions above and select Defib Pads from the drop down box in the AP
Setup screen. Set the AP type to BF and Patient Connections to 2.
Confirm with the
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3).
button (F3).
button (F2)
Repeat the actions above and select Defib Pads from the drop down box in the AP
Setup screen. Set the AP type to BF and Patient Connections to 2.
Confirm with the
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3).
The following screen shows an example Applied Part Configuration still showing
Applied Part 3 (CF 8..11).
The following screen shows an example Applied Part Configuration still showing
Applied Part 3 (CF 8..11).
To delete Applied Part 3, highlight line 3 using the Up & Down Keys and press the
To delete Applied Part 3, highlight line 3 using the Up & Down Keys and press the
button (F2).
button (F2).
There are two options to delete an Applied Part.
There are two options to delete an Applied Part.
Option 1:
Option 1:
Set the AP type to BLANK and leave the Patient Connections to 4; This would not
ignore Connections 8-11 in an electrical safety test. However additional Applied Parts
are not possible as the maximum number of connections is 10.
Set the AP type to BLANK and leave the Patient Connections to 4; This would not
ignore Connections 8-11 in an electrical safety test. However additional Applied Parts
are not possible as the maximum number of connections is 10.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Confirm with the
28
button (F4) or exit using the
Highlight Applied Part 2 and press the
button (F3).
Confirm with the
button (F2)
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3).
28
button (F4) or exit using the
Highlight Applied Part 2 and press the
Repeat the actions above and select Defib Pads from the drop down box in the AP
Setup screen. Set the AP type to BF and Patient Connections to 2.
Confirm with the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F3).
button (F2)
Repeat the actions above and select Defib Pads from the drop down box in the AP
Setup screen. Set the AP type to BF and Patient Connections to 2.
Confirm with the
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3).
The following screen shows an example Applied Part Configuration still showing
Applied Part 3 (CF 8..11).
The following screen shows an example Applied Part Configuration still showing
Applied Part 3 (CF 8..11).
To delete Applied Part 3, highlight line 3 using the Up & Down Keys and press the
To delete Applied Part 3, highlight line 3 using the Up & Down Keys and press the
button (F2).
button (F2).
There are two options to delete an Applied Part.
There are two options to delete an Applied Part.
Option 1:
Option 1:
Set the AP type to BLANK and leave the Patient Connections to 4; This would not
ignore Connections 8-11 in an electrical safety test. However additional Applied Parts
are not possible as the maximum number of connections is 10.
Set the AP type to BLANK and leave the Patient Connections to 4; This would not
ignore Connections 8-11 in an electrical safety test. However additional Applied Parts
are not possible as the maximum number of connections is 10.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
28
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
28
This feature could be useful to blank a number of connections between Applied Parts
and can be done by inserting a BLANK AP type with an applicable number of
connections in between B, BF or CF Applied Parts.
This feature could be useful to blank a number of connections between Applied Parts
and can be done by inserting a BLANK AP type with an applicable number of
connections in between B, BF or CF Applied Parts.
Option 2:
Option 2:
Set the AP type to BLANK and the Patient Connections to 0; This would delete the
whole Applied Part and free up the remaining connections.
Set the AP type to BLANK and the Patient Connections to 0; This would delete the
whole Applied Part and free up the remaining connections.
Option 1
Confirm with the
Option 2
button (F4) or exit using the
Option 1
Confirm with the
button (F3).
When returning to the Edit Test Code Name screen, cnfirm and save the Test Code by
button (F4), see below.
pressing the
Option 2
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3).
When returning to the Edit Test Code Name screen, cnfirm and save the Test Code by
button (F4), see below.
pressing the
Be aware, pressing the Escape button (F3) would return to the initial test code screen
and default settings. All information will be lost.
Be aware, pressing the Escape button (F3) would return to the initial test code screen
and default settings. All information will be lost.
Test Code 1234 has now been configured and saved. The screen below shows the
available Test Code(s) and is / are available for use in the Automatic test mode. (see
4.1)
Test Code 1234 has now been configured and saved. The screen below shows the
available Test Code(s) and is / are available for use in the Automatic test mode. (see
4.1)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
29
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
29
This feature could be useful to blank a number of connections between Applied Parts
and can be done by inserting a BLANK AP type with an applicable number of
connections in between B, BF or CF Applied Parts.
This feature could be useful to blank a number of connections between Applied Parts
and can be done by inserting a BLANK AP type with an applicable number of
connections in between B, BF or CF Applied Parts.
Option 2:
Option 2:
Set the AP type to BLANK and the Patient Connections to 0; This would delete the
whole Applied Part and free up the remaining connections.
Set the AP type to BLANK and the Patient Connections to 0; This would delete the
whole Applied Part and free up the remaining connections.
Option 1
Confirm with the
Option 2
button (F4) or exit using the
Option 1
Confirm with the
button (F3).
When returning to the Edit Test Code Name screen, cnfirm and save the Test Code by
pressing the
button (F4), see below.
Option 2
button (F4) or exit using the
button (F3).
When returning to the Edit Test Code Name screen, cnfirm and save the Test Code by
pressing the
button (F4), see below.
Be aware, pressing the Escape button (F3) would return to the initial test code screen
and default settings. All information will be lost.
Be aware, pressing the Escape button (F3) would return to the initial test code screen
and default settings. All information will be lost.
Test Code 1234 has now been configured and saved. The screen below shows the
available Test Code(s) and is / are available for use in the Automatic test mode. (see
4.1)
Test Code 1234 has now been configured and saved. The screen below shows the
available Test Code(s) and is / are available for use in the Automatic test mode. (see
4.1)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
29
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
29
To create further Test Codes, press the
decribed in 3.2
button (F1) and repeat the actions as
Once all Test Codes have been completed, save all data by pressing the
(F3) and confirm the changes made.
To return to the Home Screen, press the
3.3.
button
To create further Test Codes, press the
decribed in 3.2
Once all Test Codes have been completed, save all data by pressing the
(F3) and confirm the changes made.
To return to the Home Screen, press the
button (F3) see below.
Asset Trace Variables
button (F1) and repeat the actions as
3.3.
button
button (F3) see below.
Asset Trace Variables
The Asset Trace Variables allow the user to include valuable data to the test results to
enhance the traceability and to provide increased search criteria when using database
software. Asset trace variables may consist of a maximum of 25 characters and can be
selected prior to each electrical safety test when using the Rigel 288 in automatic
mode.
The Asset Trace Variables allow the user to include valuable data to the test results to
enhance the traceability and to provide increased search criteria when using database
software. Asset trace variables may consist of a maximum of 25 characters and can be
selected prior to each electrical safety test when using the Rigel 288 in automatic
mode.
The following variables can be added to the test results:
The following variables can be added to the test results:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
To create further Test Codes, press the
decribed in 3.2
30
button (F1) and repeat the actions as
Once all Test Codes have been completed, save all data by pressing the
(F3) and confirm the changes made.
To return to the Home Screen, press the
3.3.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button
To create further Test Codes, press the
decribed in 3.2
Asset Trace Variables
button (F1) and repeat the actions as
Once all Test Codes have been completed, save all data by pressing the
(F3) and confirm the changes made.
To return to the Home Screen, press the
button (F3) see below.
30
3.3.
button
button (F3) see below.
Asset Trace Variables
The Asset Trace Variables allow the user to include valuable data to the test results to
enhance the traceability and to provide increased search criteria when using database
software. Asset trace variables may consist of a maximum of 25 characters and can be
selected prior to each electrical safety test when using the Rigel 288 in automatic
mode.
The Asset Trace Variables allow the user to include valuable data to the test results to
enhance the traceability and to provide increased search criteria when using database
software. Asset trace variables may consist of a maximum of 25 characters and can be
selected prior to each electrical safety test when using the Rigel 288 in automatic
mode.
The following variables can be added to the test results:
The following variables can be added to the test results:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
30
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
30
The default settings on the Rigel 288 include the Site and Location variables. Both are
activated. The drop down box is set to [Yes].
The default settings on the Rigel 288 include the Site and Location variables. Both are
activated. The drop down box is set to [Yes].
To activate or de-activate each variable, use the up and down keys to select the
variable and the left and right keys to select yes or no.
To activate or de-activate each variable, use the up and down keys to select the
variable and the left and right keys to select yes or no.
Once a variable has been activated, the user is given the ability to enter Trace
Variables prior to a safety test by selecting from or adding to the list of default items.
Each variable entered during the automatic test will automatically be added to the list
for future use.
Once a variable has been activated, the user is given the ability to enter Trace
Variables prior to a safety test by selecting from or adding to the list of default items.
Each variable entered during the automatic test will automatically be added to the list
for future use.
Trace Variables that are de-activated (set to NO) will not appear during the automatic
tests.
Trace Variables that are de-activated (set to NO) will not appear during the automatic
tests.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace Variable.
Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace Variable.
Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
3.4.
System Config
3.4.
System Config
This feature can setup the Rigel 288 to automatically perform certain features during or
after a test as well as allowing the user to set Time and Date preference.
This feature can setup the Rigel 288 to automatically perform certain features during or
after a test as well as allowing the user to set Time and Date preference.
To select System Config, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the menu
and System Config from the list as shown below;
To select System Config, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the menu
and System Config from the list as shown below;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
31
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
31
The default settings on the Rigel 288 include the Site and Location variables. Both are
activated. The drop down box is set to [Yes].
The default settings on the Rigel 288 include the Site and Location variables. Both are
activated. The drop down box is set to [Yes].
To activate or de-activate each variable, use the up and down keys to select the
variable and the left and right keys to select yes or no.
To activate or de-activate each variable, use the up and down keys to select the
variable and the left and right keys to select yes or no.
Once a variable has been activated, the user is given the ability to enter Trace
Variables prior to a safety test by selecting from or adding to the list of default items.
Each variable entered during the automatic test will automatically be added to the list
for future use.
Once a variable has been activated, the user is given the ability to enter Trace
Variables prior to a safety test by selecting from or adding to the list of default items.
Each variable entered during the automatic test will automatically be added to the list
for future use.
Trace Variables that are de-activated (set to NO) will not appear during the automatic
tests.
Trace Variables that are de-activated (set to NO) will not appear during the automatic
tests.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace Variable.
Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace Variable.
Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
3.4.
System Config
3.4.
System Config
This feature can setup the Rigel 288 to automatically perform certain features during or
after a test as well as allowing the user to set Time and Date preference.
This feature can setup the Rigel 288 to automatically perform certain features during or
after a test as well as allowing the user to set Time and Date preference.
To select System Config, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the menu
and System Config from the list as shown below;
To select System Config, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the menu
and System Config from the list as shown below;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
31
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
31
The System Config menu is displayed below;
The System Config menu is displayed below;
The System Config menu provides the following features:
The System Config menu provides the following features:
3.4.1. Asset ID
3.4.1. Asset ID
Provides automatic Asset ID configuration. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
•
Increment - Automatically increments the next Asset ID’s least significant
number by 1
Blank – Will leave the next Asset ID field blank
Repeat Last - Will copy the previous Asset ID into the next Asset ID field
Provides automatic Asset ID configuration. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
•
3.4.2. After Test
3.4.2. After Test
Provides automatic action after a test is completed. Use the left and right keys to
select from the following
•
•
•
•
•
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
Provides automatic action after a test is completed. Use the left and right keys to
select from the following
•
•
•
•
•
3.4.3. Comments
Provides the ability to enter further comments after successful or failed tests. Use the
left and right keys to select from the following
•
•
•
•
Always – Comment field is displayed after each passed or failed test.
On Pass – Comment field is displayed after a passed test only.
On Failure – Comment field is displayed after failed test only
Never – Comment field is not displayed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
3.4.3. Comments
Provides the ability to enter further comments after successful or failed tests. Use the
left and right keys to select from the following
•
•
•
•
Increment - Automatically increments the next Asset ID’s least significant
number by 1
Blank – Will leave the next Asset ID field blank
Repeat Last - Will copy the previous Asset ID into the next Asset ID field
32
Always – Comment field is displayed after each passed or failed test.
On Pass – Comment field is displayed after a passed test only.
On Failure – Comment field is displayed after failed test only
Never – Comment field is not displayed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
The System Config menu is displayed below;
The System Config menu is displayed below;
The System Config menu provides the following features:
The System Config menu provides the following features:
3.4.1. Asset ID
3.4.1. Asset ID
Provides automatic Asset ID configuration. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
•
Increment - Automatically increments the next Asset ID’s least significant
number by 1
Blank – Will leave the next Asset ID field blank
Repeat Last - Will copy the previous Asset ID into the next Asset ID field
Provides automatic Asset ID configuration. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
•
3.4.2. After Test
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
Provides automatic action after a test is completed. Use the left and right keys to
select from the following
•
•
•
•
•
3.4.3. Comments
Provides the ability to enter further comments after successful or failed tests. Use the
left and right keys to select from the following
•
•
•
•
Always – Comment field is displayed after each passed or failed test.
On Pass – Comment field is displayed after a passed test only.
On Failure – Comment field is displayed after failed test only
Never – Comment field is not displayed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
3.4.3. Comments
Provides the ability to enter further comments after successful or failed tests. Use the
left and right keys to select from the following
•
•
•
•
Increment - Automatically increments the next Asset ID’s least significant
number by 1
Blank – Will leave the next Asset ID field blank
Repeat Last - Will copy the previous Asset ID into the next Asset ID field
3.4.2. After Test
Provides automatic action after a test is completed. Use the left and right keys to
select from the following
•
•
•
•
•
32
32
Always – Comment field is displayed after each passed or failed test.
On Pass – Comment field is displayed after a passed test only.
On Failure – Comment field is displayed after failed test only
Never – Comment field is not displayed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
32
3.4.4. Applied Part Results
3.4.4. Applied Part Results
Provides the ability to change the amount of patient leakage data stored to save
memory and keep reports short and relevant. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
Save Worst Only – Automatically saves the patient connection within an applied
part with the highest reading for a specific normal or single fault condition
provided all patient connections pass the test.
Save All – All patient connections in all applied parts are saved.
Provides the ability to change the amount of patient leakage data stored to save
memory and keep reports short and relevant. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
3.4.5. Language
3.4.5. Language
Provides the ability to change the default language in the Rigel 288. A total of 5
languages can be made available. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select from
the available languages. Additional languages can be downloaded from
www.rigelmedical.com or contact our sales office at +44 (0) 191 5878745.
Provides the ability to change the default language in the Rigel 288. A total of 5
languages can be made available. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select from
the available languages. Additional languages can be downloaded from
www.rigelmedical.com or contact our sales office at +44 (0) 191 5878745.
3.4.6. Check IEC lead Polarity
3.4.6. Check IEC lead Polarity
Provides the ability to set the Rigel 288 for polarised (eg UK 3-pin) or non-polarised (eg
Schuko 2-pin) mains supplies.
•
•
Save Worst Only – Automatically saves the patient connection within an applied
part with the highest reading for a specific normal or single fault condition
provided all patient connections pass the test.
Save All – All patient connections in all applied parts are saved.
Yes - Automatically checks for incoming mains reversal and includes a Live
Neutral polarity check during an IEC lead test. The Rigel 288 will display a
message during power-up in case incoming mains is reversed
No – Incoming mains reversal and IEC polarity checks are disabled. No mains
reversal messages are displayed at power-up.
Provides the ability to set the Rigel 288 for polarised (eg UK 3-pin) or non-polarised (eg
Schuko 2-pin) mains supplies.
•
•
3.4.7. Date / Time
Yes - Automatically checks for incoming mains reversal and includes a Live
Neutral polarity check during an IEC lead test. The Rigel 288 will display a
message during power-up in case incoming mains is reversed
No – Incoming mains reversal and IEC polarity checks are disabled. No mains
reversal messages are displayed at power-up.
3.4.7. Date / Time
Allows the user to set the current date / time and preferred formats.
Allows the user to set the current date / time and preferred formats.
Press the Date / Time button (F2). The following menu will be displayed;
Press the Date / Time button (F2). The following menu will be displayed;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
33
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
3.4.4. Applied Part Results
3.4.4. Applied Part Results
Provides the ability to change the amount of patient leakage data stored to save
memory and keep reports short and relevant. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
Save Worst Only – Automatically saves the patient connection within an applied
part with the highest reading for a specific normal or single fault condition
provided all patient connections pass the test.
Save All – All patient connections in all applied parts are saved.
Provides the ability to change the amount of patient leakage data stored to save
memory and keep reports short and relevant. Use the Left & Right Keys to select
between
•
•
3.4.5. Language
Provides the ability to change the default language in the Rigel 288. A total of 5
languages can be made available. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select from
the available languages. Additional languages can be downloaded from
www.rigelmedical.com or contact our sales office at +44 (0) 191 5878745.
3.4.6. Check IEC lead Polarity
3.4.6. Check IEC lead Polarity
Provides the ability to set the Rigel 288 for polarised (eg UK 3-pin) or non-polarised (eg
Schuko 2-pin) mains supplies.
•
Save Worst Only – Automatically saves the patient connection within an applied
part with the highest reading for a specific normal or single fault condition
provided all patient connections pass the test.
Save All – All patient connections in all applied parts are saved.
3.4.5. Language
Provides the ability to change the default language in the Rigel 288. A total of 5
languages can be made available. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select from
the available languages. Additional languages can be downloaded from
www.rigelmedical.com or contact our sales office at +44 (0) 191 5878745.
•
Yes - Automatically checks for incoming mains reversal and includes a Live
Neutral polarity check during an IEC lead test. The Rigel 288 will display a
message during power-up in case incoming mains is reversed
No – Incoming mains reversal and IEC polarity checks are disabled. No mains
reversal messages are displayed at power-up.
3.4.7. Date / Time
Provides the ability to set the Rigel 288 for polarised (eg UK 3-pin) or non-polarised (eg
Schuko 2-pin) mains supplies.
•
•
Yes - Automatically checks for incoming mains reversal and includes a Live
Neutral polarity check during an IEC lead test. The Rigel 288 will display a
message during power-up in case incoming mains is reversed
No – Incoming mains reversal and IEC polarity checks are disabled. No mains
reversal messages are displayed at power-up.
3.4.7. Date / Time
Allows the user to set the current date / time and preferred formats.
Allows the user to set the current date / time and preferred formats.
Press the Date / Time button (F2). The following menu will be displayed;
Press the Date / Time button (F2). The following menu will be displayed;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
33
33
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
33
Date Format:
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the date format to
dd Month yyyy or mm / dd // yyyy
Date Format:
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the date format to
dd Month yyyy or mm / dd // yyyy
Time Format
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the time format to
AM / PM or 24 hour
Time Format
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the time format to
AM / PM or 24 hour
Day
Month
Year
Time
Enter current day
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the current month
Enter current year
Enter current time. Use the ‘:’ (F1) to separate hours from
minutes to ensure the correct time is entered and saved.
Day
Month
Year
Time
Enter current day
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the current month
Enter current year
Enter current time. Use the ‘:’ (F1) to separate hours from
minutes to ensure the correct time is entered and saved.
Confirm the settings by pressing the
Ones all System Configurations have been completed, press the
Changes are saved automatically.
3.5.
Confirm the settings by pressing the
button (F4)
button (F4).
Blue Tooth Favourites
button (F4)
Ones all System Configurations have been completed, press the
Changes are saved automatically.
3.5.
button (F4).
Blue Tooth Favourites
In order for the Rigel 288 to automatically connect to the correct Bluetooth accessory,
details of that accessory must be entered into the Bluetooth Favourites list.
In order for the Rigel 288 to automatically connect to the correct Bluetooth accessory,
details of that accessory must be entered into the Bluetooth Favourites list.
The Bluetooth Favourites list comprises of three sub-lists (device types), each of which
can store up to 3 accessories of the same type. The three sub-lists are shown below:
The Bluetooth Favourites list comprises of three sub-lists (device types), each of which
can store up to 3 accessories of the same type. The three sub-lists are shown below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Barcode (Scanner)
Printer
Computer
To select Bluetooth Favourites, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the
Menu and Bluetooth Favourites from the list as shown below. Press
select;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) to
34
Barcode (Scanner)
Printer
Computer
To select Bluetooth Favourites, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the
Menu and Bluetooth Favourites from the list as shown below. Press
select;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) to
34
Date Format:
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the date format to
dd Month yyyy or mm / dd // yyyy
Date Format:
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the date format to
dd Month yyyy or mm / dd // yyyy
Time Format
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the time format to
AM / PM or 24 hour
Time Format
Use the Left & Right Keys to set the time format to
AM / PM or 24 hour
Day
Month
Year
Time
Enter current day
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the current month
Enter current year
Enter current time. Use the ‘:’ (F1) to separate hours from
minutes to ensure the correct time is entered and saved.
Day
Month
Year
Time
Enter current day
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the current month
Enter current year
Enter current time. Use the ‘:’ (F1) to separate hours from
minutes to ensure the correct time is entered and saved.
Confirm the settings by pressing the
Ones all System Configurations have been completed, press the
Changes are saved automatically.
3.5.
Confirm the settings by pressing the
button (F4)
button (F4).
Blue Tooth Favourites
button (F4)
Ones all System Configurations have been completed, press the
Changes are saved automatically.
3.5.
button (F4).
Blue Tooth Favourites
In order for the Rigel 288 to automatically connect to the correct Bluetooth accessory,
details of that accessory must be entered into the Bluetooth Favourites list.
In order for the Rigel 288 to automatically connect to the correct Bluetooth accessory,
details of that accessory must be entered into the Bluetooth Favourites list.
The Bluetooth Favourites list comprises of three sub-lists (device types), each of which
can store up to 3 accessories of the same type. The three sub-lists are shown below:
The Bluetooth Favourites list comprises of three sub-lists (device types), each of which
can store up to 3 accessories of the same type. The three sub-lists are shown below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Barcode (Scanner)
Printer
Computer
To select Bluetooth Favourites, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the
Menu and Bluetooth Favourites from the list as shown below. Press
select;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) to
34
Barcode (Scanner)
Printer
Computer
To select Bluetooth Favourites, press the
button (F4) followed by Setup in the
Menu and Bluetooth Favourites from the list as shown below. Press
select;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) to
34
The following shows how to add a Computer to Bluetooth Favourites.
The following shows how to add a Computer to Bluetooth Favourites.
Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the device type (in this case Computer) then
Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the device type (in this case Computer) then
press
press
(F3).
(F3).
Make sure that the device you want to add to your new favourites is switched on.
Make sure that the device you want to add to your new favourites is switched on.
(F1). The Rigel 288 will search for all discoverable Bluetooth devices
Press
within a 10m range. The time taken to perform the search will vary depending on the
number of Bluetooth devices in range.
(F1). The Rigel 288 will search for all discoverable Bluetooth devices
Press
within a 10m range. The time taken to perform the search will vary depending on the
number of Bluetooth devices in range.
Wait for the progress bar to complete.
Wait for the progress bar to complete.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the field labelled “New” and press the left or right keys
to open the list of devices which have been found during the search.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the field labelled “New” and press the left or right keys
to open the list of devices which have been found during the search.
Note: If more than 10 Bluetooth devices have been found the list will show the
last 10 devices found.
Note: If more than 10 Bluetooth devices have been found the list will show the
last 10 devices found.
In the following example, the search has identified Bluetooth devices named
“SELLT023”, “Shaz” and “V-equals”
In the following example, the search has identified Bluetooth devices named
“SELLT023”, “Shaz” and “V-equals”
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
35
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
35
The following shows how to add a Computer to Bluetooth Favourites.
The following shows how to add a Computer to Bluetooth Favourites.
Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the device type (in this case Computer) then
Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight the device type (in this case Computer) then
press
press
(F3).
(F3).
Make sure that the device you want to add to your new favourites is switched on.
Make sure that the device you want to add to your new favourites is switched on.
(F1). The Rigel 288 will search for all discoverable Bluetooth devices
Press
within a 10m range. The time taken to perform the search will vary depending on the
number of Bluetooth devices in range.
(F1). The Rigel 288 will search for all discoverable Bluetooth devices
Press
within a 10m range. The time taken to perform the search will vary depending on the
number of Bluetooth devices in range.
Wait for the progress bar to complete.
Wait for the progress bar to complete.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the field labelled “New” and press the left or right keys
to open the list of devices which have been found during the search.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the field labelled “New” and press the left or right keys
to open the list of devices which have been found during the search.
Note: If more than 10 Bluetooth devices have been found the list will show the
last 10 devices found.
Note: If more than 10 Bluetooth devices have been found the list will show the
last 10 devices found.
In the following example, the search has identified Bluetooth devices named
“SELLT023”, “Shaz” and “V-equals”
In the following example, the search has identified Bluetooth devices named
“SELLT023”, “Shaz” and “V-equals”
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
35
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
35
Note: If the required device is not shown, check that it is powered on with the
Bluetooth function active then repeat the search.
Note: If the required device is not shown, check that it is powered on with the
Bluetooth function active then repeat the search.
Note: Some Bluetooth devices do not report a recognisable name and may cause
confusion when setting up Favourites. Turn off or disable unused Bluetooth
devices when configuring Favourites.
Note: Some Bluetooth devices do not report a recognisable name and may cause
confusion when setting up Favourites. Turn off or disable unused Bluetooth
devices when configuring Favourites.
Use the up/down keys to highlight the required device (in this case SELLT023i) and
Use the up/down keys to highlight the required device (in this case SELLT023i) and
press the
below.
Press
button (F4). SELLT023 is now placed in the “New” field as shown
(F3) to add SELLT023 to the Favourite Computer list.
press the
below.
Press
button (F4). SELLT023 is now placed in the “New” field as shown
(F3) to add SELLT023 to the Favourite Computer list.
To add further devices to the list of available computers select the new field again, use
To add further devices to the list of available computers select the new field again, use
the up, down, left and right keys to select the required device and press
add the chosen device.
the up, down, left and right keys to select the required device and press
add the chosen device.
(F3) to
“SELLT023” has been added to the Computer field with Bluetooth ID.
“SELLT023” has been added to the Computer field with Bluetooth ID.
Press
Press
(F4) to store the changes and return to the previous screen.
A PIN number can be entered if required for the device to be added to the Favourites
list.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
36
(F3) to
(F4) to store the changes and return to the previous screen.
A PIN number can be entered if required for the device to be added to the Favourites
list.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
36
Note: If the required device is not shown, check that it is powered on with the
Bluetooth function active then repeat the search.
Note: If the required device is not shown, check that it is powered on with the
Bluetooth function active then repeat the search.
Note: Some Bluetooth devices do not report a recognisable name and may cause
confusion when setting up Favourites. Turn off or disable unused Bluetooth
devices when configuring Favourites.
Note: Some Bluetooth devices do not report a recognisable name and may cause
confusion when setting up Favourites. Turn off or disable unused Bluetooth
devices when configuring Favourites.
Use the up/down keys to highlight the required device (in this case SELLT023i) and
Use the up/down keys to highlight the required device (in this case SELLT023i) and
press the
below.
Press
button (F4). SELLT023 is now placed in the “New” field as shown
(F3) to add SELLT023 to the Favourite Computer list.
press the
below.
Press
button (F4). SELLT023 is now placed in the “New” field as shown
(F3) to add SELLT023 to the Favourite Computer list.
To add further devices to the list of available computers select the new field again, use
To add further devices to the list of available computers select the new field again, use
the up, down, left and right keys to select the required device and press
add the chosen device.
the up, down, left and right keys to select the required device and press
add the chosen device.
(F3) to
“SELLT023” has been added to the Computer field with Bluetooth ID.
“SELLT023” has been added to the Computer field with Bluetooth ID.
Press
Press
(F4) to store the changes and return to the previous screen.
A PIN number can be entered if required for the device to be added to the Favourites
list.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
36
(F3) to
(F4) to store the changes and return to the previous screen.
A PIN number can be entered if required for the device to be added to the Favourites
list.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
36
Note: Seaward and Rigel accessories do not require a PIN. For other Bluetooth
devices refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.
Note: Seaward and Rigel accessories do not require a PIN. For other Bluetooth
devices refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.
Note: Devices that are not required can easily be removed by selecting the
Computer field, pressing the left of right keys to open the list, highlighting a
Note: Devices that are not required can easily be removed by selecting the
Computer field, pressing the left of right keys to open the list, highlighting a
device using the up/down keys and pressing
deletion by pressing the
button (F4). Press the
save Bluetooth Favourites settings.
(F2). Confirm the
button (F4) to
device using the up/down keys and pressing
deletion by pressing the
button (F4). Press the
save Bluetooth Favourites settings.
(F2). Confirm the
button (F4) to
All Bluetooth devices have a unique ID. The Bluetooth ID is shown when a
device is added to the Favourites list.
All Bluetooth devices have a unique ID. The Bluetooth ID is shown when a
device is added to the Favourites list.
“SELLT023” is now a Bluetooth Favourite and the Rigel 288 will automatically establish
a connection with “SELLT023” when using functions that communicate with a
computer e.g. downloading records to a PC database software package.
“SELLT023” is now a Bluetooth Favourite and the Rigel 288 will automatically establish
a connection with “SELLT023” when using functions that communicate with a
computer e.g. downloading records to a PC database software package.
Note: Press
(F2) to exit without saving changes.
Note: Press
(F2) to exit without saving changes.
Press
(F3) if necessary, to select another device..
Press
(F3) if necessary, to select another device..
Press
(F4) button to save changes.
Press
(F4) button to save changes.
When all your favourite devices have been set up, press
saved.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) and they will be
37
When all your favourite devices have been set up, press
saved.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) and they will be
37
Note: Seaward and Rigel accessories do not require a PIN. For other Bluetooth
devices refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.
Note: Seaward and Rigel accessories do not require a PIN. For other Bluetooth
devices refer to the manufacturer’s documentation.
Note: Devices that are not required can easily be removed by selecting the
Computer field, pressing the left of right keys to open the list, highlighting a
Note: Devices that are not required can easily be removed by selecting the
Computer field, pressing the left of right keys to open the list, highlighting a
device using the up/down keys and pressing
button (F4). Press the
deletion by pressing the
save Bluetooth Favourites settings.
(F2). Confirm the
button (F4) to
device using the up/down keys and pressing
button (F4). Press the
deletion by pressing the
save Bluetooth Favourites settings.
(F2). Confirm the
button (F4) to
All Bluetooth devices have a unique ID. The Bluetooth ID is shown when a
device is added to the Favourites list.
All Bluetooth devices have a unique ID. The Bluetooth ID is shown when a
device is added to the Favourites list.
“SELLT023” is now a Bluetooth Favourite and the Rigel 288 will automatically establish
a connection with “SELLT023” when using functions that communicate with a
computer e.g. downloading records to a PC database software package.
“SELLT023” is now a Bluetooth Favourite and the Rigel 288 will automatically establish
a connection with “SELLT023” when using functions that communicate with a
computer e.g. downloading records to a PC database software package.
Note: Press
(F2) to exit without saving changes.
Note: Press
(F2) to exit without saving changes.
Press
(F3) if necessary, to select another device..
Press
(F3) if necessary, to select another device..
Press
(F4) button to save changes.
Press
(F4) button to save changes.
When all your favourite devices have been set up, press
saved.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) and they will be
37
When all your favourite devices have been set up, press
saved.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
(F4) and they will be
37
3.6.
User Admin
3.6.
The User Admin feature allows the user to personalise the way in which the tester
behaves during normal use and include features such as:
•
•
•
•
To enter the User Admin feature, press the
select Setup followed be User Admin.
The User Admin feature allows the user to personalise the way in which the tester
behaves during normal use and include features such as:
•
•
•
•
Preferences (see 3.6.1)
Change User (see 3.6.2)
Change Password (see 3.6.3)
User Profile (see 3.6.4)
button (F1) from the home screen,
User Admin
Preferences (see 3.6.1)
Change User (see 3.6.2)
Change Password (see 3.6.3)
User Profile (see 3.6.4)
To enter the User Admin feature, press the
select Setup followed be User Admin.
button (F1) from the home screen,
The following menu will appear:
The following menu will appear:
Navigate through this menu using the Up & Down Keys and select by pressing the
Navigate through this menu using the Up & Down Keys and select by pressing the
button (F4) or the right arrow key.
button (F4) or the right arrow key.
3.6.1. Preferences
3.6.1. Preferences
Provides means of configuring the default settings of the tester’s behaviour during
normal use. All settings are user specific and stored against the logged-in user :
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
3.6.
38
User Admin
button (F1) from the home screen,
38
User Admin
The User Admin feature allows the user to personalise the way in which the tester
behaves during normal use and include features such as:
•
•
•
•
Preferences (see 3.6.1)
Change User (see 3.6.2)
Change Password (see 3.6.3)
User Profile (see 3.6.4)
To enter the User Admin feature, press the
select Setup followed be User Admin.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
3.6.
The User Admin feature allows the user to personalise the way in which the tester
behaves during normal use and include features such as:
•
•
•
•
Provides means of configuring the default settings of the tester’s behaviour during
normal use. All settings are user specific and stored against the logged-in user :
Preferences (see 3.6.1)
Change User (see 3.6.2)
Change Password (see 3.6.3)
User Profile (see 3.6.4)
To enter the User Admin feature, press the
select Setup followed be User Admin.
button (F1) from the home screen,
The following menu will appear:
The following menu will appear:
Navigate through this menu using the Up & Down Keys and select by pressing the
Navigate through this menu using the Up & Down Keys and select by pressing the
button (F4) or the right arrow key.
button (F4) or the right arrow key.
3.6.1. Preferences
3.6.1. Preferences
Provides means of configuring the default settings of the tester’s behaviour during
normal use. All settings are user specific and stored against the logged-in user :
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
38
Provides means of configuring the default settings of the tester’s behaviour during
normal use. All settings are user specific and stored against the logged-in user :
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
38
•
Set Contrast – Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the contrast
•
Set Contrast – Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the contrast
•
Auto Off Time (mins)- Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the power
off time on the tester. Settings between 0- 10 minutes. Note 0 minutes will
deactivate the AutoSwitch Off feature.
•
Auto Off Time (mins)- Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the power
off time on the tester. Settings between 0- 10 minutes. Note 0 minutes will
deactivate the AutoSwitch Off feature.
•
Data Entry – Sets the tester up to take data entry from Barcode or Keypad
only. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select Barcode or Keypad only.
•
Data Entry – Sets the tester up to take data entry from Barcode or Keypad
only. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select Barcode or Keypad only.
Note: In data entry mode the unit will automatically try to connect to a barcode
scanner via the internal Bluetooth module – if the scanner is available this feature
will drain the batteries u-necessarily. In this instance it is recommended that the
unit be set to Keypad only.
Note: In data entry mode the unit will automatically try to connect to a barcode
scanner via the internal Bluetooth module – if the scanner is available this feature
will drain the batteries u-necessarily. In this instance it is recommended that the
unit be set to Keypad only.
•
Backlight Mode – Chose between Always Off, Always On, Power Save (Back
light on for 30 secs after each key press). Use the up, down, left and right keys
to select.
•
Backlight Mode – Chose between Always Off, Always On, Power Save (Back
light on for 30 secs after each key press). Use the up, down, left and right keys
to select.
•
Type of User - Use the up, down, left and right keys to select between Novice
and Expert. Novice users benefit from additional instructions throughout the
safety tests. The Expert setting removes those additional instructions. These
instructions are:
•
Type of User - Use the up, down, left and right keys to select between Novice
and Expert. Novice users benefit from additional instructions throughout the
safety tests. The Expert setting removes those additional instructions. These
instructions are:
1
2
3
•
Warning message before the first Insulation test in auto mode
Warning message before the first EUT power on in auto mode
Warning message if user tries to execute a Test Code that has missing
test sequences.
User Rights – For information only. To change the user rights, see 3.6.4
1
2
3
•
Warning message before the first Insulation test in auto mode
Warning message before the first EUT power on in auto mode
Warning message if user tries to execute a Test Code that has missing
test sequences.
User Rights – For information only. To change the user rights, see 3.6.4
The
(F2) button allows the user to set the audible warnings and beep on
key presses. See menu below:
The
(F2) button allows the user to set the audible warnings and beep on
key presses. See menu below:
Navigate using the Up & Down Keys and change between Yes / No using the
left key.
Navigate using the Up & Down Keys and change between Yes / No using the
left key.
Confirm the settings using:
Confirm the settings using:
o
o
button (F4) this will return to the Home screen
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
39
button (F4) this will return to the Home screen
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
39
•
Set Contrast – Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the contrast
•
Set Contrast – Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the contrast
•
Auto Off Time (mins)- Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the power
off time on the tester. Settings between 0- 10 minutes. Note 0 minutes will
deactivate the AutoSwitch Off feature.
•
Auto Off Time (mins)- Use the up, down, left and right keys to set the power
off time on the tester. Settings between 0- 10 minutes. Note 0 minutes will
deactivate the AutoSwitch Off feature.
•
Data Entry – Sets the tester up to take data entry from Barcode or Keypad
only. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select Barcode or Keypad only.
•
Data Entry – Sets the tester up to take data entry from Barcode or Keypad
only. Use the up, down, left and right keys to select Barcode or Keypad only.
Note: In data entry mode the unit will automatically try to connect to a barcode
scanner via the internal Bluetooth module – if the scanner is available this feature
will drain the batteries u-necessarily. In this instance it is recommended that the
unit be set to Keypad only.
Note: In data entry mode the unit will automatically try to connect to a barcode
scanner via the internal Bluetooth module – if the scanner is available this feature
will drain the batteries u-necessarily. In this instance it is recommended that the
unit be set to Keypad only.
•
Backlight Mode – Chose between Always Off, Always On, Power Save (Back
light on for 30 secs after each key press). Use the up, down, left and right keys
to select.
•
Backlight Mode – Chose between Always Off, Always On, Power Save (Back
light on for 30 secs after each key press). Use the up, down, left and right keys
to select.
•
Type of User - Use the up, down, left and right keys to select between Novice
and Expert. Novice users benefit from additional instructions throughout the
safety tests. The Expert setting removes those additional instructions. These
instructions are:
•
Type of User - Use the up, down, left and right keys to select between Novice
and Expert. Novice users benefit from additional instructions throughout the
safety tests. The Expert setting removes those additional instructions. These
instructions are:
1
2
3
•
Warning message before the first Insulation test in auto mode
Warning message before the first EUT power on in auto mode
Warning message if user tries to execute a Test Code that has missing
test sequences.
User Rights – For information only. To change the user rights, see 3.6.4
1
2
3
•
Warning message before the first Insulation test in auto mode
Warning message before the first EUT power on in auto mode
Warning message if user tries to execute a Test Code that has missing
test sequences.
User Rights – For information only. To change the user rights, see 3.6.4
The
(F2) button allows the user to set the audible warnings and beep on
key presses. See menu below:
The
(F2) button allows the user to set the audible warnings and beep on
key presses. See menu below:
Navigate using the Up & Down Keys and change between Yes / No using the
left key.
Navigate using the Up & Down Keys and change between Yes / No using the
left key.
Confirm the settings using:
Confirm the settings using:
o
o
button (F4) this will return to the Home screen
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
39
button (F4) this will return to the Home screen
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
39
o
o
o
button (F2) will return to previous menu and save data.
button (F3) will return to the home screen without changes
being saved.
3.6.2. Change User
o
button (F2) will return to previous menu and save data.
button (F3) will return to the home screen without changes
being saved.
3.6.2. Change User
This feature allows an operator to default to a different existing user or setup a new
user. Admin rights are required for this feature. Alternatively, new users can be created
in the User Profile menu, see below.
This feature allows an operator to default to a different existing user or setup a new
user. Admin rights are required for this feature. Alternatively, new users can be created
in the User Profile menu, see below.
Note A brand new Rigel 288 will automatically default to admin rights so new
users can be created.
Note A brand new Rigel 288 will automatically default to admin rights so new
users can be created.
3.6.3. Change Password
3.6.3. Change Password
This feature allows a new password to be assigned or changes to an existing
password.
This feature allows a new password to be assigned or changes to an existing
password.
To create a new password, highlight the New Password field using the Up & Down
Keys and enter a new password followed by confirmation of the new password. Use
To create a new password, highlight the New Password field using the Up & Down
Keys and enter a new password followed by confirmation of the new password. Use
the
key (F4) to finish and press the
the new password.
the
key (F4) to finish and press the
the new password.
button (F4) to confirm and save
To change an existing password, enter current password and repeat the steps above.
See menu below for an overview of the Change Password screen.
3.6.4. User Profile
button (F4) to confirm and save
To change an existing password, enter current password and repeat the steps above.
See menu below for an overview of the Change Password screen.
3.6.4. User Profile
This feature allows the administrator to setup new and existing users and inhibit or
assign certain feautures to individual users.
This feature allows the administrator to setup new and existing users and inhibit or
assign certain feautures to individual users.
Note that the User Profile is only valid when the ADMIN user has been setup with
a PASSWORD. See item above. If no ADMIN password has been set, all users
have FULL User Rights.
Note that the User Profile is only valid when the ADMIN user has been setup with
a PASSWORD. See item above. If no ADMIN password has been set, all users
have FULL User Rights.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
o
o
40
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
o
button (F2) will return to previous menu and save data.
button (F3) will return to the home screen without changes
being saved.
3.6.2. Change User
o
40
button (F2) will return to previous menu and save data.
button (F3) will return to the home screen without changes
being saved.
3.6.2. Change User
This feature allows an operator to default to a different existing user or setup a new
user. Admin rights are required for this feature. Alternatively, new users can be created
in the User Profile menu, see below.
This feature allows an operator to default to a different existing user or setup a new
user. Admin rights are required for this feature. Alternatively, new users can be created
in the User Profile menu, see below.
Note A brand new Rigel 288 will automatically default to admin rights so new
users can be created.
Note A brand new Rigel 288 will automatically default to admin rights so new
users can be created.
3.6.3. Change Password
3.6.3. Change Password
This feature allows a new password to be assigned or changes to an existing
password.
This feature allows a new password to be assigned or changes to an existing
password.
To create a new password, highlight the New Password field using the Up & Down
Keys and enter a new password followed by confirmation of the new password. Use
To create a new password, highlight the New Password field using the Up & Down
Keys and enter a new password followed by confirmation of the new password. Use
the
key (F4) to finish and press the
the new password.
the
key (F4) to finish and press the
the new password.
button (F4) to confirm and save
To change an existing password, enter current password and repeat the steps above.
See menu below for an overview of the Change Password screen.
3.6.4. User Profile
button (F4) to confirm and save
To change an existing password, enter current password and repeat the steps above.
See menu below for an overview of the Change Password screen.
3.6.4. User Profile
This feature allows the administrator to setup new and existing users and inhibit or
assign certain feautures to individual users.
This feature allows the administrator to setup new and existing users and inhibit or
assign certain feautures to individual users.
Note that the User Profile is only valid when the ADMIN user has been setup with
a PASSWORD. See item above. If no ADMIN password has been set, all users
have FULL User Rights.
Note that the User Profile is only valid when the ADMIN user has been setup with
a PASSWORD. See item above. If no ADMIN password has been set, all users
have FULL User Rights.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
40
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
40
Select the applicable user name, use the Up & Down Keys to navigate through the
menu, use the Left & Right Keys to activiate (yes) or de-activate (no) certain features.
See menu below.
Select the applicable user name, use the Up & Down Keys to navigate through the
menu, use the Left & Right Keys to activiate (yes) or de-activate (no) certain features.
See menu below.
Press the
Press the
3.7.
button (F4) to save user profile.
Memory options
3.7.
button (F4) to save user profile.
Memory options
This feature is used to view information about the Rigel 288 memory status. Press
This feature is used to view information about the Rigel 288 memory status. Press
(F4), select setup using the up/down keys and select Memory Options by
(F4), select setup using the up/down keys and select Memory Options by
pressing the press
(F4) to accept.
pressing the press
(F4) to accept.
The display shows the number of asset records currently stored, the remaining
memory space, number of assets deleted and number of assets in upload memory.
The display shows the number of asset records currently stored, the remaining
memory space, number of assets deleted and number of assets in upload memory.
The nature of Flash memory is such that when records are deleted only the reference
to the data is removed. The data still remains and will use memory space. The memory
must be erased in order to release memory used by deleted records.
The nature of Flash memory is such that when records are deleted only the reference
to the data is removed. The data still remains and will use memory space. The memory
must be erased in order to release memory used by deleted records.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
41
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
41
Select the applicable user name, use the Up & Down Keys to navigate through the
menu, use the Left & Right Keys to activiate (yes) or de-activate (no) certain features.
See menu below.
Select the applicable user name, use the Up & Down Keys to navigate through the
menu, use the Left & Right Keys to activiate (yes) or de-activate (no) certain features.
See menu below.
Press the
Press the
3.7.
button (F4) to save user profile.
Memory options
3.7.
button (F4) to save user profile.
Memory options
This feature is used to view information about the Rigel 288 memory status. Press
This feature is used to view information about the Rigel 288 memory status. Press
(F4), select setup using the up/down keys and select Memory Options by
(F4), select setup using the up/down keys and select Memory Options by
pressing the press
(F4) to accept.
pressing the press
(F4) to accept.
The display shows the number of asset records currently stored, the remaining
memory space, number of assets deleted and number of assets in upload memory.
The display shows the number of asset records currently stored, the remaining
memory space, number of assets deleted and number of assets in upload memory.
The nature of Flash memory is such that when records are deleted only the reference
to the data is removed. The data still remains and will use memory space. The memory
must be erased in order to release memory used by deleted records.
The nature of Flash memory is such that when records are deleted only the reference
to the data is removed. The data still remains and will use memory space. The memory
must be erased in order to release memory used by deleted records.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
41
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
41
If the Erase (F2) key is pressed, a prompt is shown below. To erase the memory press
button (F4).
3.8.
If the Erase (F2) key is pressed, a prompt is shown below. To erase the memory press
button (F4).
Restore Factory Settings
3.8.
The factory settings can be restored at any time using this function. Press
(F4). Select Setup followed by Restore Factory Settings.
button
Restore Factory Settings
The factory settings can be restored at any time using this function. Press
(F4). Select Setup followed by Restore Factory Settings.
button
All the settings provided within the Setup menu will default to Factory Settings
including; All Asset Trace Variables, Test Sequences, User Admin, Test Codes and
System Config.
All the settings provided within the Setup menu will default to Factory Settings
including; All Asset Trace Variables, Test Sequences, User Admin, Test Codes and
System Config.
Warning: Restore Factory Settings cannot be undone and will remove all the
customised items described above.
Warning: Restore Factory Settings cannot be undone and will remove all the
customised items described above.
Hint; All customised settings within Setup can be cloned to a PC. We advise that this is
done on a regular basis to ensure custom settings are saved for back-up. See 7.4 for
further details on Cloning.
Hint; All customised settings within Setup can be cloned to a PC. We advise that this is
done on a regular basis to ensure custom settings are saved for back-up. See 7.4 for
further details on Cloning.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
42
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
If the Erase (F2) key is pressed, a prompt is shown below. To erase the memory press
button (F4).
3.8.
42
If the Erase (F2) key is pressed, a prompt is shown below. To erase the memory press
button (F4).
Restore Factory Settings
3.8.
The factory settings can be restored at any time using this function. Press
(F4). Select Setup followed by Restore Factory Settings.
button
Restore Factory Settings
The factory settings can be restored at any time using this function. Press
(F4). Select Setup followed by Restore Factory Settings.
button
All the settings provided within the Setup menu will default to Factory Settings
including; All Asset Trace Variables, Test Sequences, User Admin, Test Codes and
System Config.
All the settings provided within the Setup menu will default to Factory Settings
including; All Asset Trace Variables, Test Sequences, User Admin, Test Codes and
System Config.
Warning: Restore Factory Settings cannot be undone and will remove all the
customised items described above.
Warning: Restore Factory Settings cannot be undone and will remove all the
customised items described above.
Hint; All customised settings within Setup can be cloned to a PC. We advise that this is
done on a regular basis to ensure custom settings are saved for back-up. See 7.4 for
further details on Cloning.
Hint; All customised settings within Setup can be cloned to a PC. We advise that this is
done on a regular basis to ensure custom settings are saved for back-up. See 7.4 for
further details on Cloning.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
42
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
42
4. Automatic Mode
4. Automatic Mode
The Automatic mode provides the user with the ability to run a preset test sequence
and store the data afterwards.
The Automatic mode provides the user with the ability to run a preset test sequence
and store the data afterwards.
Asset ID
Asset ID
Each test record is stored using the Asset ID number (25 character max) and date /
time of test. Multiple entries can be applied using the same Asset ID number. In this
case, the memory will hold all entries and differentiate using the test date.
Each test record is stored using the Asset ID number (25 character max) and date /
time of test. Multiple entries can be applied using the same Asset ID number. In this
case, the memory will hold all entries and differentiate using the test date.
Test Codes
Test Codes
Efficiency is increased by using the 4-digit Test Codes which allow the user to group
certain Test Sequences with Applied Part Configurations. See 3.2 more information on
Test Codes.)
Efficiency is increased by using the 4-digit Test Codes which allow the user to group
certain Test Sequences with Applied Part Configurations. See 3.2 more information on
Test Codes.)
Test Sequence
Test Sequence
The Rigel 288 comes standard with preset test routines to meet the requirements of:
• IEC 60601-1
• IEC 62353
• AAMi (US version)
• NFPA-99 (US version)
• VDE 0701 / 0702
The Rigel 288 comes standard with preset test routines to meet the requirements of:
• IEC 60601-1
• IEC 62353
• AAMi (US version)
• NFPA-99 (US version)
• VDE 0701 / 0702
In addition, the user can create a total of 50 preset test sequences to meet local or
specific requirements. (See 3.1 more information on creating new test sequences)
In addition, the user can create a total of 50 preset test sequences to meet local or
specific requirements. (See 3.1 more information on creating new test sequences)
Test Period
Test Period
The re-test period allows the user to include the next test date on printed labels and
PC downloads that make it easier to schedule future work. More details on printing
labels see 4.2)
The re-test period allows the user to include the next test date on printed labels and
PC downloads that make it easier to schedule future work. More details on printing
labels see 4.2)
Trace Variables
Trace Variables
To increase the traceability of the safety test, the user can include valuable data with
the test record such as Re-test period and Asset variables (see 3.3 for more
information)
To increase the traceability of the safety test, the user can include valuable data with
the test record such as Re-test period and Asset variables (see 3.3 for more
information)
4.1.
Performing an Automatic Test:
4.1.
The automatic mode provides an option to test in full automatic or semi autoatic mode.
In full automatic mode, the Rigel 288 will step through the non powered tests and once
the powered tests (load and leakage tests) have started, all test conditions including
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
43
Performing an Automatic Test:
The automatic mode provides an option to test in full automatic or semi autoatic mode.
In full automatic mode, the Rigel 288 will step through the non powered tests and once
the powered tests (load and leakage tests) have started, all test conditions including
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
43
4. Automatic Mode
4. Automatic Mode
The Automatic mode provides the user with the ability to run a preset test sequence
and store the data afterwards.
The Automatic mode provides the user with the ability to run a preset test sequence
and store the data afterwards.
Asset ID
Asset ID
Each test record is stored using the Asset ID number (25 character max) and date /
time of test. Multiple entries can be applied using the same Asset ID number. In this
case, the memory will hold all entries and differentiate using the test date.
Each test record is stored using the Asset ID number (25 character max) and date /
time of test. Multiple entries can be applied using the same Asset ID number. In this
case, the memory will hold all entries and differentiate using the test date.
Test Codes
Test Codes
Efficiency is increased by using the 4-digit Test Codes which allow the user to group
certain Test Sequences with Applied Part Configurations. See 3.2 more information on
Test Codes.)
Efficiency is increased by using the 4-digit Test Codes which allow the user to group
certain Test Sequences with Applied Part Configurations. See 3.2 more information on
Test Codes.)
Test Sequence
Test Sequence
The Rigel 288 comes standard with preset test routines to meet the requirements of:
• IEC 60601-1
• IEC 62353
• AAMi (US version)
• NFPA-99 (US version)
• VDE 0701 / 0702
The Rigel 288 comes standard with preset test routines to meet the requirements of:
• IEC 60601-1
• IEC 62353
• AAMi (US version)
• NFPA-99 (US version)
• VDE 0701 / 0702
In addition, the user can create a total of 50 preset test sequences to meet local or
specific requirements. (See 3.1 more information on creating new test sequences)
In addition, the user can create a total of 50 preset test sequences to meet local or
specific requirements. (See 3.1 more information on creating new test sequences)
Test Period
Test Period
The re-test period allows the user to include the next test date on printed labels and
PC downloads that make it easier to schedule future work. More details on printing
labels see 4.2)
The re-test period allows the user to include the next test date on printed labels and
PC downloads that make it easier to schedule future work. More details on printing
labels see 4.2)
Trace Variables
Trace Variables
To increase the traceability of the safety test, the user can include valuable data with
the test record such as Re-test period and Asset variables (see 3.3 for more
information)
To increase the traceability of the safety test, the user can include valuable data with
the test record such as Re-test period and Asset variables (see 3.3 for more
information)
4.1.
Performing an Automatic Test:
4.1.
The automatic mode provides an option to test in full automatic or semi autoatic mode.
In full automatic mode, the Rigel 288 will step through the non powered tests and once
the powered tests (load and leakage tests) have started, all test conditions including
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
43
Performing an Automatic Test:
The automatic mode provides an option to test in full automatic or semi autoatic mode.
In full automatic mode, the Rigel 288 will step through the non powered tests and once
the powered tests (load and leakage tests) have started, all test conditions including
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
43
single fault conditions are executed automatically without the required intervention of
an operator.
4.1.1. Semi Automatic Test Mode
single fault conditions are executed automatically without the required intervention of
an operator.
4.1.1. Semi Automatic Test Mode
When testing Medical Devices, it is important that measurements are taken when the
Equipment Under Test (EUT) is fully operational (a requirement of IEC 60601-1 and
subsequent standards).
When testing Medical Devices, it is important that measurements are taken when the
Equipment Under Test (EUT) is fully operational (a requirement of IEC 60601-1 and
subsequent standards).
The Rigel 288 has a unique Semi Automatic Mode that allows manual control of
power-up and power-down of the EUT as well as controlling the test sequence. This
ensures that correct measurements are performed and provide sufficient time to
power-down any device which is sensitive to power-breaks e.g. Ultrasound Equipment
and PC based ME Equipment.
The Rigel 288 has a unique Semi Automatic Mode that allows manual control of
power-up and power-down of the EUT as well as controlling the test sequence. This
ensures that correct measurements are performed and provide sufficient time to
power-down any device which is sensitive to power-breaks e.g. Ultrasound Equipment
and PC based ME Equipment.
Below is a graph highlighting the Grouping of Single Fault Conditions (booox) and the
delays which are manually controlled by the User (ta, tb, tc & td) and the time in which
the safety analyser performs the automatic test routines.
Below is a graph highlighting the Grouping of Single Fault Conditions (booox) and the
delays which are manually controlled by the User (ta, tb, tc & td) and the time in which
the safety analyser performs the automatic test routines.
4.1.2. Failure Menu
4.1.2. Failure Menu
When a specific test fails, the user will be provided with a number of options
depending on the nature of the fault. The Failure Menu will enable the user to:
•
•
•
•
•
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
When a specific test fails, the user will be provided with a number of options
depending on the nature of the fault. The Failure Menu will enable the user to:
•
•
Restart Test (Individual test)
Restart Test Sequence (Whole Test
sequence)
Resume Test (Skip the failed test)
End Test Sequence (store result
and follow options. See 4.3)
Abort
Test
Sequence
(no
information stored, return to home
screen)
44
single fault conditions are executed automatically without the required intervention of
an operator.
4.1.1. Semi Automatic Test Mode
•
•
•
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Restart Test (Individual test)
Restart Test Sequence (Whole Test
sequence)
Resume Test (Skip the failed test)
End Test Sequence (store result
and follow options. See 4.3)
Abort
Test
Sequence
(no
information stored, return to home
screen)
44
single fault conditions are executed automatically without the required intervention of
an operator.
4.1.1. Semi Automatic Test Mode
When testing Medical Devices, it is important that measurements are taken when the
Equipment Under Test (EUT) is fully operational (a requirement of IEC 60601-1 and
subsequent standards).
When testing Medical Devices, it is important that measurements are taken when the
Equipment Under Test (EUT) is fully operational (a requirement of IEC 60601-1 and
subsequent standards).
The Rigel 288 has a unique Semi Automatic Mode that allows manual control of
power-up and power-down of the EUT as well as controlling the test sequence. This
ensures that correct measurements are performed and provide sufficient time to
power-down any device which is sensitive to power-breaks e.g. Ultrasound Equipment
and PC based ME Equipment.
The Rigel 288 has a unique Semi Automatic Mode that allows manual control of
power-up and power-down of the EUT as well as controlling the test sequence. This
ensures that correct measurements are performed and provide sufficient time to
power-down any device which is sensitive to power-breaks e.g. Ultrasound Equipment
and PC based ME Equipment.
Below is a graph highlighting the Grouping of Single Fault Conditions (booox) and the
delays which are manually controlled by the User (ta, tb, tc & td) and the time in which
the safety analyser performs the automatic test routines.
Below is a graph highlighting the Grouping of Single Fault Conditions (booox) and the
delays which are manually controlled by the User (ta, tb, tc & td) and the time in which
the safety analyser performs the automatic test routines.
4.1.2. Failure Menu
4.1.2. Failure Menu
When a specific test fails, the user will be provided with a number of options
depending on the nature of the fault. The Failure Menu will enable the user to:
•
•
•
•
•
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
When a specific test fails, the user will be provided with a number of options
depending on the nature of the fault. The Failure Menu will enable the user to:
•
•
Restart Test (Individual test)
Restart Test Sequence (Whole Test
sequence)
Resume Test (Skip the failed test)
End Test Sequence (store result
and follow options. See 4.3)
Abort
Test
Sequence
(no
information stored, return to home
screen)
44
•
•
•
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Restart Test (Individual test)
Restart Test Sequence (Whole Test
sequence)
Resume Test (Skip the failed test)
End Test Sequence (store result
and follow options. See 4.3)
Abort
Test
Sequence
(no
information stored, return to home
screen)
44
The following procedures describe the setup and completion of an automatic test
sequence. The steps are applicable to all available test sequences. As example we
describe a typical automatic test to IEC 60601.
The following procedures describe the setup and completion of an automatic test
sequence. The steps are applicable to all available test sequences. As example we
describe a typical automatic test to IEC 60601.
Press the
button (F4) from the home screen and select Auto Mode. This will show
the Asset Details screen as detailed below;
Press the
button (F4) from the home screen and select Auto Mode. This will show
the Asset Details screen as detailed below;
Select the right criteria for the Satety Test from the Asset Details screen;
Select the right criteria for the Satety Test from the Asset Details screen;
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Asset ID number using the keypad or barcode scanner.
Enter the Test Code if this has been created (see 3.2)
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the required Test Sequence
Select the Run Mode (Semi or Full Automatic) using the up, down, left and right
keys.
5. Enter the required test period in months.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Asset ID number using the keypad or barcode scanner.
Enter the Test Code if this has been created (see 3.2)
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the required Test Sequence
Select the Run Mode (Semi or Full Automatic) using the up, down, left and right
keys.
5. Enter the required test period in months.
6. Configure the Applied Part module when required by pressing the
button (F1).
6. Configure the Applied Part module when required by pressing the
button (F1).
The following screen presents a default setup for:
The following screen presents a default setup for:
10 x type CF (1..10)
10 x type CF (1..10)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
45
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
45
The following procedures describe the setup and completion of an automatic test
sequence. The steps are applicable to all available test sequences. As example we
describe a typical automatic test to IEC 60601.
The following procedures describe the setup and completion of an automatic test
sequence. The steps are applicable to all available test sequences. As example we
describe a typical automatic test to IEC 60601.
Press the
button (F4) from the home screen and select Auto Mode. This will show
the Asset Details screen as detailed below;
Press the
button (F4) from the home screen and select Auto Mode. This will show
the Asset Details screen as detailed below;
Select the right criteria for the Satety Test from the Asset Details screen;
Select the right criteria for the Satety Test from the Asset Details screen;
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Asset ID number using the keypad or barcode scanner.
Enter the Test Code if this has been created (see 3.2)
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the required Test Sequence
Select the Run Mode (Semi or Full Automatic) using the up, down, left and right
keys.
5. Enter the required test period in months.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Asset ID number using the keypad or barcode scanner.
Enter the Test Code if this has been created (see 3.2)
Use the up, down, left and right keys to select the required Test Sequence
Select the Run Mode (Semi or Full Automatic) using the up, down, left and right
keys.
5. Enter the required test period in months.
6. Configure the Applied Part module when required by pressing the
button (F1).
6. Configure the Applied Part module when required by pressing the
button (F1).
The following screen presents a default setup for:
The following screen presents a default setup for:
10 x type CF (1..10)
10 x type CF (1..10)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
45
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
45
To configure the Applied Part Module to meet your requirements, please see
3.2.2 for more information.
When the configuration has been completed, press the
Pressing the
the settings.
button (F4).
button (F3) would return to the previous screen and lose
To configure the Applied Part Module to meet your requirements, please see
3.2.2 for more information.
When the configuration has been completed, press the
Pressing the
the settings.
button (F4).
button (F3) would return to the previous screen and lose
button (F2) provides the user
7. Returning to the Asset Details screen, the
with the option to modify or create a new Test Sequence from this menu. This
feature is identical to that of the Test Sequence feature in the Setup - Test
Sequence menu. (See 3.1 for more information)
button (F2) provides the user
7. Returning to the Asset Details screen, the
with the option to modify or create a new Test Sequence from this menu. This
feature is identical to that of the Test Sequence feature in the Setup - Test
Sequence menu. (See 3.1 for more information)
When all parameters are set, press the
button (4) to enter the Asset Trace
Variables screen (when applicable). In this example, all Asset Variables are activated.
When all parameters are set, press the
button (4) to enter the Asset Trace
Variables screen (when applicable). In this example, all Asset Variables are activated.
8. Use the Up & Down Keys to navigate the menu and the Left & Right Keys to
open the drop down boxes [<>]. Select the required input and confirm with the
8. Use the Up & Down Keys to navigate the menu and the Left & Right Keys to
open the drop down boxes [<>]. Select the required input and confirm with the
button (F4). Each variable entered during the automatic test will
automatically be added to the list for future use. Trace Variables that are de-
button (F4). Each variable entered during the automatic test will
automatically be added to the list for future use. Trace Variables that are de-
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
46
To configure the Applied Part Module to meet your requirements, please see
3.2.2 for more information.
When the configuration has been completed, press the
Pressing the
the settings.
button (F4).
button (F3) would return to the previous screen and lose
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
46
To configure the Applied Part Module to meet your requirements, please see
3.2.2 for more information.
When the configuration has been completed, press the
Pressing the
the settings.
button (F4).
button (F3) would return to the previous screen and lose
button (F2) provides the user
7. Returning to the Asset Details screen, the
with the option to modify or create a new Test Sequence from this menu. This
feature is identical to that of the Test Sequence feature in the Setup - Test
Sequence menu. (See 3.1 for more information)
button (F2) provides the user
7. Returning to the Asset Details screen, the
with the option to modify or create a new Test Sequence from this menu. This
feature is identical to that of the Test Sequence feature in the Setup - Test
Sequence menu. (See 3.1 for more information)
When all parameters are set, press the
button (4) to enter the Asset Trace
Variables screen (when applicable). In this example, all Asset Variables are activated.
When all parameters are set, press the
button (4) to enter the Asset Trace
Variables screen (when applicable). In this example, all Asset Variables are activated.
8. Use the Up & Down Keys to navigate the menu and the Left & Right Keys to
open the drop down boxes [<>]. Select the required input and confirm with the
8. Use the Up & Down Keys to navigate the menu and the Left & Right Keys to
open the drop down boxes [<>]. Select the required input and confirm with the
button (F4). Each variable entered during the automatic test will
automatically be added to the list for future use. Trace Variables that are de-
button (F4). Each variable entered during the automatic test will
automatically be added to the list for future use. Trace Variables that are de-
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
46
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
46
activated (set to NO in the Setup menu, section 3.3) will not appear during the
automatic tests.
activated (set to NO in the Setup menu, section 3.3) will not appear during the
automatic tests.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace
Variable. Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace
Variable. Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
When all information is provided, press the
button (F4) to start the safety test.
When all information is provided, press the
button (F4) to start the safety test.
To ensure the safety of the user, non-electrical tests are done prior to the powered
electrical safety tests.
To ensure the safety of the user, non-electrical tests are done prior to the powered
electrical safety tests.
Non-powered tests are deemed;
Non-powered tests are deemed;
•
•
•
•
•
•
Visual and Custom tests (if applicable),
Earthbond test (class I)
Insulation test (if applicable)
Visual and Custom tests (if applicable),
Earthbond test (class I)
Insulation test (if applicable)
In this example we will perform a safety test on Class I equipment, using a preset test
sequence, based on IEC 60601-1 with added Visual Test prior to the safety test and a
Custom Test followin the successful safety test.
In this example we will perform a safety test on Class I equipment, using a preset test
sequence, based on IEC 60601-1 with added Visual Test prior to the safety test and a
Custom Test followin the successful safety test.
The Applied Part Configuration is set to default and the test is executed in Semi
Automatic mode.
The Applied Part Configuration is set to default and the test is executed in Semi
Automatic mode.
Visual Test
Visual Test
This is the first test in the test sequence;
This is the first test in the test sequence;
Press the corresponding appropriate button to select the outcome of the visual test.
Press the corresponding appropriate button to select the outcome of the visual test.
Note 1: Custom Visual tests can be created. See 3.1.5 for more information.
Note 2: If one or more Visual tests result in a failure, a Failure menu will appear.
Note 1: Custom Visual tests can be created. See 3.1.5 for more information.
Note 2: If one or more Visual tests result in a failure, a Failure menu will appear.
Provided the test has Passed, the next test will be the Earth Continuity
Provided the test has Passed, the next test will be the Earth Continuity
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
47
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
47
activated (set to NO in the Setup menu, section 3.3) will not appear during the
automatic tests.
activated (set to NO in the Setup menu, section 3.3) will not appear during the
automatic tests.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace
Variable. Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
Note that a maximum of 40 individual entries are available for each Trace
Variable. Additional entries will overwrite on a first in first out basis.
When all information is provided, press the
button (F4) to start the safety test.
When all information is provided, press the
button (F4) to start the safety test.
To ensure the safety of the user, non-electrical tests are done prior to the powered
electrical safety tests.
To ensure the safety of the user, non-electrical tests are done prior to the powered
electrical safety tests.
Non-powered tests are deemed;
Non-powered tests are deemed;
•
•
•
•
•
•
Visual and Custom tests (if applicable),
Earthbond test (class I)
Insulation test (if applicable)
Visual and Custom tests (if applicable),
Earthbond test (class I)
Insulation test (if applicable)
In this example we will perform a safety test on Class I equipment, using a preset test
sequence, based on IEC 60601-1 with added Visual Test prior to the safety test and a
Custom Test followin the successful safety test.
In this example we will perform a safety test on Class I equipment, using a preset test
sequence, based on IEC 60601-1 with added Visual Test prior to the safety test and a
Custom Test followin the successful safety test.
The Applied Part Configuration is set to default and the test is executed in Semi
Automatic mode.
The Applied Part Configuration is set to default and the test is executed in Semi
Automatic mode.
Visual Test
Visual Test
This is the first test in the test sequence;
This is the first test in the test sequence;
Press the corresponding appropriate button to select the outcome of the visual test.
Press the corresponding appropriate button to select the outcome of the visual test.
Note 1: Custom Visual tests can be created. See 3.1.5 for more information.
Note 2: If one or more Visual tests result in a failure, a Failure menu will appear.
Note 1: Custom Visual tests can be created. See 3.1.5 for more information.
Note 2: If one or more Visual tests result in a failure, a Failure menu will appear.
Provided the test has Passed, the next test will be the Earth Continuity
Provided the test has Passed, the next test will be the Earth Continuity
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
47
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
47
Attention! Ensure the earth bond test lead is connected to the green socket
when testing between probe and EUT earth.
Attention! Ensure the earth bond test lead is connected to the green socket
when testing between probe and EUT earth.
Press the Calc button (F2) to calculate the pass fail limit based on the type of cable
(mm²) and cable length.
Press the Calc button (F2) to calculate the pass fail limit based on the type of cable
(mm²) and cable length.
Pressing the
Pressing the
button (F3) will bring up the failure menu (see 4.1.2)
Press the Green start key to start the earth continuity test.
button (F3) will bring up the failure menu (see 4.1.2)
Press the Green start key to start the earth continuity test.
Caution, never connect the Earth Bond Probe to voltages in excess of 30V
since this can cause damage to the equipment.
Caution, never connect the Earth Bond Probe to voltages in excess of 30V
since this can cause damage to the equipment.
The earth bond test screen provides both a digital read-out as well as a bar-graph
indication. In addition, the test duration (top right corner), limit ([0.200 Ohms) and Tick
mark are provided to demonstrate the test has passed.
The earth bond test screen provides both a digital read-out as well as a bar-graph
indication. In addition, the test duration (top right corner), limit ([0.200 Ohms) and Tick
mark are provided to demonstrate the test has passed.
If the test fails, the failure menu will be displayed. See 4.1.2
If the test fails, the failure menu will be displayed. See 4.1.2
Once the non-powered tests have been completed, the user is warned that the EUT is
about to be switched on.
Once the non-powered tests have been completed, the user is warned that the EUT is
about to be switched on.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
48
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
48
Attention! Ensure the earth bond test lead is connected to the green socket
when testing between probe and EUT earth.
Attention! Ensure the earth bond test lead is connected to the green socket
when testing between probe and EUT earth.
Press the Calc button (F2) to calculate the pass fail limit based on the type of cable
(mm²) and cable length.
Press the Calc button (F2) to calculate the pass fail limit based on the type of cable
(mm²) and cable length.
Pressing the
Pressing the
button (F3) will bring up the failure menu (see 4.1.2)
Press the Green start key to start the earth continuity test.
button (F3) will bring up the failure menu (see 4.1.2)
Press the Green start key to start the earth continuity test.
Caution, never connect the Earth Bond Probe to voltages in excess of 30V
since this can cause damage to the equipment.
Caution, never connect the Earth Bond Probe to voltages in excess of 30V
since this can cause damage to the equipment.
The earth bond test screen provides both a digital read-out as well as a bar-graph
indication. In addition, the test duration (top right corner), limit ([0.200 Ohms) and Tick
mark are provided to demonstrate the test has passed.
The earth bond test screen provides both a digital read-out as well as a bar-graph
indication. In addition, the test duration (top right corner), limit ([0.200 Ohms) and Tick
mark are provided to demonstrate the test has passed.
If the test fails, the failure menu will be displayed. See 4.1.2
If the test fails, the failure menu will be displayed. See 4.1.2
Once the non-powered tests have been completed, the user is warned that the EUT is
about to be switched on.
Once the non-powered tests have been completed, the user is warned that the EUT is
about to be switched on.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
48
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
48
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Warning
Mains voltage applied to appliance.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to appliance.
This example uses the Semi Automatic Mode and the user has the opportunity to
determine the moment at which the leakage measurements start. In fully automatic
mode , the Rigel 288 will start the measurements immediately after the EUT has been
switched on.
This example uses the Semi Automatic Mode and the user has the opportunity to
determine the moment at which the leakage measurements start. In fully automatic
mode , the Rigel 288 will start the measurements immediately after the EUT has been
switched on.
The initial powered test is a load test. The Rigel 288 will check for a short circuit EUT
and ensure the applied load (EUT) is less than 16 A.
The initial powered test is a load test. The Rigel 288 will check for a short circuit EUT
and ensure the applied load (EUT) is less than 16 A.
In case of a short circuit in the EUT, the Rigel 288 will not power-up and a warning
message is displayed.
In case of a short circuit in the EUT, the Rigel 288 will not power-up and a warning
message is displayed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
49
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
49
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Warning
Mains voltage applied to appliance.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to appliance.
This example uses the Semi Automatic Mode and the user has the opportunity to
determine the moment at which the leakage measurements start. In fully automatic
mode , the Rigel 288 will start the measurements immediately after the EUT has been
switched on.
This example uses the Semi Automatic Mode and the user has the opportunity to
determine the moment at which the leakage measurements start. In fully automatic
mode , the Rigel 288 will start the measurements immediately after the EUT has been
switched on.
The initial powered test is a load test. The Rigel 288 will check for a short circuit EUT
and ensure the applied load (EUT) is less than 16 A.
The initial powered test is a load test. The Rigel 288 will check for a short circuit EUT
and ensure the applied load (EUT) is less than 16 A.
In case of a short circuit in the EUT, the Rigel 288 will not power-up and a warning
message is displayed.
In case of a short circuit in the EUT, the Rigel 288 will not power-up and a warning
message is displayed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
49
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
49
Following the Load Test, the individual leakage tests are polled, displayed and
measured.
Following the Load Test, the individual leakage tests are polled, displayed and
measured.
Note that all leakage measurements are grouped by Single Fault Condition (SFC)
As such, all leakage measurements are carried out for a specific SFC, leakage
measurements are then repeated for the next SFC. This is to minimise the power
breaks and power ups. By grouping the SFC’s, the Rigel 288 is able to perform a full
IEC 60601-1 test, only requiring two power breaks.
Note that all leakage measurements are grouped by Single Fault Condition (SFC)
As such, all leakage measurements are carried out for a specific SFC, leakage
measurements are then repeated for the next SFC. This is to minimise the power
breaks and power ups. By grouping the SFC’s, the Rigel 288 is able to perform a full
IEC 60601-1 test, only requiring two power breaks.
The sequence of Single Fault Conditions is;
The sequence of Single Fault Conditions is;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Normal Supply
Normal Supply Open Earth SFC (for Class I equipment only),
Normal Supply Open Neutral (Power Break),
Reversed Supply (Power on),
Reversed Supply Open Earth, (for Class I equipment only),
Reversed Supply Open Neutral (Power Break)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The applicable SFC is displayed in the bottom left side of the display. The following is
a typical sequence for a class 1 device.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
50
Normal Supply
Normal Supply Open Earth SFC (for Class I equipment only),
Normal Supply Open Neutral (Power Break),
Reversed Supply (Power on),
Reversed Supply Open Earth, (for Class I equipment only),
Reversed Supply Open Neutral (Power Break)
The applicable SFC is displayed in the bottom left side of the display. The following is
a typical sequence for a class 1 device.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
50
Following the Load Test, the individual leakage tests are polled, displayed and
measured.
Following the Load Test, the individual leakage tests are polled, displayed and
measured.
Note that all leakage measurements are grouped by Single Fault Condition (SFC)
As such, all leakage measurements are carried out for a specific SFC, leakage
measurements are then repeated for the next SFC. This is to minimise the power
breaks and power ups. By grouping the SFC’s, the Rigel 288 is able to perform a full
IEC 60601-1 test, only requiring two power breaks.
Note that all leakage measurements are grouped by Single Fault Condition (SFC)
As such, all leakage measurements are carried out for a specific SFC, leakage
measurements are then repeated for the next SFC. This is to minimise the power
breaks and power ups. By grouping the SFC’s, the Rigel 288 is able to perform a full
IEC 60601-1 test, only requiring two power breaks.
The sequence of Single Fault Conditions is;
The sequence of Single Fault Conditions is;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Normal Supply
Normal Supply Open Earth SFC (for Class I equipment only),
Normal Supply Open Neutral (Power Break),
Reversed Supply (Power on),
Reversed Supply Open Earth, (for Class I equipment only),
Reversed Supply Open Neutral (Power Break)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The applicable SFC is displayed in the bottom left side of the display. The following is
a typical sequence for a class 1 device.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
50
Normal Supply
Normal Supply Open Earth SFC (for Class I equipment only),
Normal Supply Open Neutral (Power Break),
Reversed Supply (Power on),
Reversed Supply Open Earth, (for Class I equipment only),
Reversed Supply Open Neutral (Power Break)
The applicable SFC is displayed in the bottom left side of the display. The following is
a typical sequence for a class 1 device.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
50
Now the test sequence requires to open the Neutral which will result in a power break.
The Semi Automatic mode provides the user with a warning and requires a
confirmation prior to interrupting the Neutral. This allows the user to properly power
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
51
Now the test sequence requires to open the Neutral which will result in a power break.
The Semi Automatic mode provides the user with a warning and requires a
confirmation prior to interrupting the Neutral. This allows the user to properly power
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
51
Now the test sequence requires to open the Neutral which will result in a power break.
The Semi Automatic mode provides the user with a warning and requires a
confirmation prior to interrupting the Neutral. This allows the user to properly power
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
51
Now the test sequence requires to open the Neutral which will result in a power break.
The Semi Automatic mode provides the user with a warning and requires a
confirmation prior to interrupting the Neutral. This allows the user to properly power
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
51
down the Medical Device and prevent possible damage caused by interupting the
power supply.
down the Medical Device and prevent possible damage caused by interupting the
power supply.
Note that this message is not available in full automatic mode. The Rigel 288 will
continue with all warning open neutral measurements.
Note that this message is not available in full automatic mode. The Rigel 288 will
continue with all warning open neutral measurements.
The next step is to reverse the power supply. The Rigel 288 will automatically reverse
the power and start the test sequence again. In the semi automatic mode, the user can
determine when the measurements start. In full automatic mode, the power reversal is
instant and measurements will start directly after mains reversal.
The next step is to reverse the power supply. The Rigel 288 will automatically reverse
the power and start the test sequence again. In the semi automatic mode, the user can
determine when the measurements start. In full automatic mode, the power reversal is
instant and measurements will start directly after mains reversal.
Following the safety tests, the user is able to store additional information within the test
record such as performance of the medical device. See 3.1.6 for more on creating
non-electrical safety tests.
Following the safety tests, the user is able to store additional information within the test
record such as performance of the medical device. See 3.1.6 for more on creating
non-electrical safety tests.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
52
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
52
down the Medical Device and prevent possible damage caused by interupting the
power supply.
down the Medical Device and prevent possible damage caused by interupting the
power supply.
Note that this message is not available in full automatic mode. The Rigel 288 will
continue with all warning open neutral measurements.
Note that this message is not available in full automatic mode. The Rigel 288 will
continue with all warning open neutral measurements.
The next step is to reverse the power supply. The Rigel 288 will automatically reverse
the power and start the test sequence again. In the semi automatic mode, the user can
determine when the measurements start. In full automatic mode, the power reversal is
instant and measurements will start directly after mains reversal.
The next step is to reverse the power supply. The Rigel 288 will automatically reverse
the power and start the test sequence again. In the semi automatic mode, the user can
determine when the measurements start. In full automatic mode, the power reversal is
instant and measurements will start directly after mains reversal.
Following the safety tests, the user is able to store additional information within the test
record such as performance of the medical device. See 3.1.6 for more on creating
non-electrical safety tests.
Following the safety tests, the user is able to store additional information within the test
record such as performance of the medical device. See 3.1.6 for more on creating
non-electrical safety tests.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
52
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
52
In this example we used a defib test. Simply enter the reading from the defibrillator
tester in the field provided. Then determine whether the test has passed or failed.
In this example we used a defib test. Simply enter the reading from the defibrillator
tester in the field provided. Then determine whether the test has passed or failed.
Additional customer tests (each 255 characters max) can be added to the test program
to provide a comprehensive test record combing visual tests with safety and
performance tests.
Additional customer tests (each 255 characters max) can be added to the test program
to provide a comprehensive test record combing visual tests with safety and
performance tests.
At the end of the test, the user has the ability to enter comments. See 3.4.3 for more
information on how to activiate comments after a test.
At the end of the test, the user has the ability to enter comments. See 3.4.3 for more
information on how to activiate comments after a test.
Press the
Press the
button (F4) to store the comments.
Depending on the settings in Menu - Setup - System Config (see 3.4.2) , a number of
After Test options are possible;
button (F4) to store the comments.
Depending on the settings in Menu - Setup - System Config (see 3.4.2) , a number of
After Test options are possible;
•
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
No further options or viewing of results available
•
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
No further options or viewing of results available
•
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
•
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
53
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
53
In this example we used a defib test. Simply enter the reading from the defibrillator
tester in the field provided. Then determine whether the test has passed or failed.
In this example we used a defib test. Simply enter the reading from the defibrillator
tester in the field provided. Then determine whether the test has passed or failed.
Additional customer tests (each 255 characters max) can be added to the test program
to provide a comprehensive test record combing visual tests with safety and
performance tests.
Additional customer tests (each 255 characters max) can be added to the test program
to provide a comprehensive test record combing visual tests with safety and
performance tests.
At the end of the test, the user has the ability to enter comments. See 3.4.3 for more
information on how to activiate comments after a test.
At the end of the test, the user has the ability to enter comments. See 3.4.3 for more
information on how to activiate comments after a test.
Press the
Press the
button (F4) to store the comments.
Depending on the settings in Menu - Setup - System Config (see 3.4.2) , a number of
After Test options are possible;
button (F4) to store the comments.
Depending on the settings in Menu - Setup - System Config (see 3.4.2) , a number of
After Test options are possible;
•
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
No further options or viewing of results available
•
New Test – Automatically brings up the next test screen.
No further options or viewing of results available
•
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
•
Download – Automatically down loads the test results to the PC (see 7.1)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
53
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
53
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer.
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer.
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
•
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Test ‘n tag Elite system
To use the Test ‘n Tag printer, add your T’nT printer to the BlueTooth Favorites. See
3.5
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Test ‘n tag Elite system
To use the Test ‘n Tag printer, add your T’nT printer to the BlueTooth Favorites. See
3.5
A detailed application note is available from the Rigel website on the used of Test’ n
Tag printers with the Rigel 288.
A detailed application note is available from the Rigel website on the used of Test’ n
Tag printers with the Rigel 288.
Please visit; http://www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
Please visit; http://www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
4.3.
Options Menu
4.3.
Options Menu
When Options has been selected in the Setup - System Config menu, the Rigel 288 will
show a Test Details screen, see below.
When Options has been selected in the Setup - System Config menu, the Rigel 288 will
show a Test Details screen, see below.
The test screen provides the following
features;
The test screen provides the following
features;
•
•
•
To view the options menu, select the
•
•
•
Go to the home screen (F1)
Continue with the next test (F2)
Options (F3)
button (F4) from the test details screen;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
54
To view the options menu, select the
Go to the home screen (F1)
Continue with the next test (F2)
Options (F3)
button (F4) from the test details screen;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
54
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer.
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Print Label – Automatically prints the test results to a thermal printer.
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Test ‘n Tag – Automatically prints a Test ‘n Tag label. (see 4.2)
No further options or viewing of results available. The tester will return to the
home screen.
•
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
•
Options Menu – Provides a menu to allow further choices after a test. (see 4.3)
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag
4.2.
Test ‘n Tag
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Test ‘n tag Elite system
To use the Test ‘n Tag printer, add your T’nT printer to the BlueTooth Favorites. See
3.5
The Rigel 288 is compatible with the Seaward Test ‘n Tag and Test ‘n tag Elite system
To use the Test ‘n Tag printer, add your T’nT printer to the BlueTooth Favorites. See
3.5
A detailed application note is available from the Rigel website on the used of Test’ n
Tag printers with the Rigel 288.
A detailed application note is available from the Rigel website on the used of Test’ n
Tag printers with the Rigel 288.
Please visit; http://www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
Please visit; http://www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
4.3.
Options Menu
4.3.
Options Menu
When Options has been selected in the Setup - System Config menu, the Rigel 288 will
show a Test Details screen, see below.
When Options has been selected in the Setup - System Config menu, the Rigel 288 will
show a Test Details screen, see below.
The test screen provides the following
features;
The test screen provides the following
features;
•
•
•
To view the options menu, select the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
•
•
•
Go to the home screen (F1)
Continue with the next test (F2)
Options (F3)
button (F4) from the test details screen;
54
To view the options menu, select the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Go to the home screen (F1)
Continue with the next test (F2)
Options (F3)
button (F4) from the test details screen;
54
The options menu provides the following sub menu:
The options menu provides the following sub menu:
View Results will display the results of the
test (see section 4.4)
User Comment will allow the user to enter
comments if required
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Result will print the result on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer
Pass Fail label. (see 4.2)
4.4.
Use the
The
View Results
View Results will display the results of the
test (see section 4.4)
User Comment will allow the user to enter
comments if required
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Result will print the result on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer
Pass Fail label. (see 4.2)
4.4.
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
Use the
The
button (F4) provides extra option to print results, label or Test ‘n tag
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
55
The options menu provides the following sub menu:
View Results
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
button (F4) provides extra option to print results, label or Test ‘n tag
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
The options menu provides the following sub menu:
View Results will display the results of the
test (see section 4.4)
User Comment will allow the user to enter
comments if required
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Result will print the result on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer
Pass Fail label. (see 4.2)
4.4.
Use the
The
View Results
View Results will display the results of the
test (see section 4.4)
User Comment will allow the user to enter
comments if required
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Result will print the result on the
thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer
Pass Fail label. (see 4.2)
4.4.
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
Use the
The
button (F4) provides extra option to print results, label or Test ‘n tag
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
55
55
View Results
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
button (F4) provides extra option to print results, label or Test ‘n tag
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
55
5. Manual Mode
5. Manual Mode
The Manual mode provides the user with the features of testing a specific
individual test and or test condition for example to aid fault diagnostic
procedures. Manual tests are available from the home screen. Use the Left &
Right Keys to scroll through the various manual tests.
The Manual mode provides the user with the features of testing a specific
individual test and or test condition for example to aid fault diagnostic
procedures. Manual tests are available from the home screen. Use the Left &
Right Keys to scroll through the various manual tests.
Manual tests can also be chosen, by pressing the
Manual Mode from the list. See below.
button (F4) and select
Do not connect any probe combination to voltages in excess of 30
V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when performing nonpower tests. This can cause damage to the equipment.
Below is a map showing where the individual tests can be selected in the
Manual Mode menu.
Manual Mode >
Earth Bond
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
IEC 62353 >
Equipment Leakage >
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Below is a map showing where the individual tests can be selected in the
Manual Mode menu.
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
Earth Bond
Insulation >
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
IEC 62353 >
Equipment Leakage >
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
IEC 60601-1>
Load test
Load test
IEC lead test
IEC lead test
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
56
button (F4) and select
Do not connect any probe combination to voltages in excess of 30
V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when performing nonpower tests. This can cause damage to the equipment.
Manual Mode >
Insulation >
IEC 60601-1>
Manual tests can also be chosen, by pressing the
Manual Mode from the list. See below.
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
56
5. Manual Mode
5. Manual Mode
The Manual mode provides the user with the features of testing a specific
individual test and or test condition for example to aid fault diagnostic
procedures. Manual tests are available from the home screen. Use the Left &
Right Keys to scroll through the various manual tests.
The Manual mode provides the user with the features of testing a specific
individual test and or test condition for example to aid fault diagnostic
procedures. Manual tests are available from the home screen. Use the Left &
Right Keys to scroll through the various manual tests.
Manual tests can also be chosen, by pressing the
Manual Mode from the list. See below.
button (F4) and select
Do not connect any probe combination to voltages in excess of 30
V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when performing nonpower tests. This can cause damage to the equipment.
Below is a map showing where the individual tests can be selected in the
Manual Mode menu.
Manual Mode >
Earth Bond
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
IEC 62353 >
Equipment Leakage >
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
Below is a map showing where the individual tests can be selected in the
Manual Mode menu.
Earth Bond
Insulation >
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
IEC 62353 >
Equipment Leakage >
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
IEC 60601-1>
Load test
Load test
IEC lead test
IEC lead test
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
56
button (F4) and select
Do not connect any probe combination to voltages in excess of 30
V AC/DC with respect to earth potential when performing nonpower tests. This can cause damage to the equipment.
Manual Mode >
Insulation >
IEC 60601-1>
Manual tests can also be chosen, by pressing the
Manual Mode from the list. See below.
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
56
For example; To select an IEC 62353 - Equipment Leakage - Direct Method;
For example; To select an IEC 62353 - Equipment Leakage - Direct Method;
Use the Up, Down, Left and Right keys to navigate through the menu and press the
Use the Up, Down, Left and Right keys to navigate through the menu and press the
button (F4) to confirm.
button (F4) to confirm.
The following manual mode screen appears;
Note: The midpoint of the analogue bargraph indicates the
(in this case 500μA)
The following manual mode screen appears;
Limit value
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
The screen shows the current measuring condition, ie;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Note: The midpoint of the analogue bargraph indicates the
(in this case 500μA)
Limit value
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
The screen shows the current measuring condition, ie;
57
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
57
For example; To select an IEC 62353 - Equipment Leakage - Direct Method;
For example; To select an IEC 62353 - Equipment Leakage - Direct Method;
Use the Up, Down, Left and Right keys to navigate through the menu and press the
Use the Up, Down, Left and Right keys to navigate through the menu and press the
button (F4) to confirm.
button (F4) to confirm.
The following manual mode screen appears;
Note: The midpoint of the analogue bargraph indicates the
(in this case 500μA)
The following manual mode screen appears;
Limit value
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
The screen shows the current measuring condition, ie;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Note: The midpoint of the analogue bargraph indicates the
(in this case 500μA)
Limit value
Warning, during many of the leakage tests the PROTECTIVE EARTH
CONDUCTOR to the appliance under test is interrupted. For this reason
additional means of protection are required in order to comply with the
relevant safety standards. For EN60601-1 leakage tests, it is
recommended that this additional protection is in the form of an isolation
transformer, with an isolated reference ground, used to power the entire
system.
The screen shows the current measuring condition, ie;
57
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
57
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Equipment Leakage (Direct Method)
2 second test duration
limit is [500μA]
Single Fault Condition (normal polarity – open earth)*
Class 1 and enclosure probe symbol
Equipment Leakage (Direct Method)
2 second test duration
limit is [500μA]
Single Fault Condition (normal polarity – open earth)*
Class 1 and enclosure probe symbol
* The IEC 62353 specifies that the Direct Method measurement is done using an
* The IEC 62353 specifies that the Direct Method measurement is done using an
interrupted earth. The
interrupted earth. The
button (F2) will only reverse the power supply.
All manual tests can be modified to meet user requirements. To change the
settings in the manual mode, simply press the
Help is available by pressing the
representation of the test.
button (F3).
All manual tests can be modified to meet user requirements. To change the
settings in the manual mode, simply press the
button (F1) in the form of a schematic
Depending of the type of test, the F2 key is either used to select the test class
(Class I or II) or to set the single fault conditions. In the latter case, the test class
menu button (F3).
can be set within the
Help is available by pressing the
representation of the test.
button (F1) in the form of a schematic
menu button (F3).
can be set within the
5.1.1. Earth Continuity
This test is applicable to Class I equipment only.
This test is applicable to Class I equipment only.
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
If an earth bond lead other than that supplied with the Rigel 288 is to be used then
any resistance associated with this lead can be zeroed out by connecting the
supplied earth bond lead to the EUT earth socket on the Rigel 288 and pressing the
zero button (F2). If the zero function has been activated then the zero icon overwrites
the single probe icon in the top left of the display. By preventing the zero button (F2)
again this function is cancelled.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
•
•
•
•
•
button (F3).
Depending of the type of test, the F2 key is either used to select the test class
(Class I or II) or to set the single fault conditions. In the latter case, the test class
5.1.1. Earth Continuity
Press the F1
button (F2) will only reverse the power supply.
58
Press the F1
If an earth bond lead other than that supplied with the Rigel 288 is to be used then
any resistance associated with this lead can be zeroed out by connecting the
supplied earth bond lead to the EUT earth socket on the Rigel 288 and pressing the
zero button (F2). If the zero function has been activated then the zero icon overwrites
the single probe icon in the top left of the display. By preventing the zero button (F2)
again this function is cancelled.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
•
•
•
•
•
Equipment Leakage (Direct Method)
2 second test duration
limit is [500μA]
Single Fault Condition (normal polarity – open earth)*
Class 1 and enclosure probe symbol
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
58
Equipment Leakage (Direct Method)
2 second test duration
limit is [500μA]
Single Fault Condition (normal polarity – open earth)*
Class 1 and enclosure probe symbol
* The IEC 62353 specifies that the Direct Method measurement is done using an
* The IEC 62353 specifies that the Direct Method measurement is done using an
interrupted earth. The
interrupted earth. The
button (F2) will only reverse the power supply.
All manual tests can be modified to meet user requirements. To change the
settings in the manual mode, simply press the
Help is available by pressing the
representation of the test.
button (F3).
button (F1) in the form of a schematic
menu button (F3).
button (F3).
button (F1) in the form of a schematic
Depending of the type of test, the F2 key is either used to select the test class
(Class I or II) or to set the single fault conditions. In the latter case, the test class
menu button (F3).
5.1.1. Earth Continuity
This test is applicable to Class I equipment only.
This test is applicable to Class I equipment only.
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
If an earth bond lead other than that supplied with the Rigel 288 is to be used then
any resistance associated with this lead can be zeroed out by connecting the
supplied earth bond lead to the EUT earth socket on the Rigel 288 and pressing the
zero button (F2). If the zero function has been activated then the zero icon overwrites
the single probe icon in the top left of the display. By preventing the zero button (F2)
again this function is cancelled.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Help is available by pressing the
representation of the test.
can be set within the
5.1.1. Earth Continuity
Press the F1
All manual tests can be modified to meet user requirements. To change the
settings in the manual mode, simply press the
Depending of the type of test, the F2 key is either used to select the test class
(Class I or II) or to set the single fault conditions. In the latter case, the test class
can be set within the
button (F2) will only reverse the power supply.
58
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
If an earth bond lead other than that supplied with the Rigel 288 is to be used then
any resistance associated with this lead can be zeroed out by connecting the
supplied earth bond lead to the EUT earth socket on the Rigel 288 and pressing the
zero button (F2). If the zero function has been activated then the zero icon overwrites
the single probe icon in the top left of the display. By preventing the zero button (F2)
again this function is cancelled.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
58
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
This test will check that the connection between the earth pin in the mains plug of the
appliance and the metal casing of the appliance is satisfactory and of sufficiently low
resistance.
This test will check that the connection between the earth pin in the mains plug of the
appliance and the metal casing of the appliance is satisfactory and of sufficiently low
resistance.
A DC test current of ±200mA is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug
and the earth bond test lead clip/probe. The worst-case result is shown on the display.
A DC test current of ±200mA is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug
and the earth bond test lead clip/probe. The worst-case result is shown on the display.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up,
down, left and right keys to highlight, set, test duration and pass/fail limit. The pass/fail
limit can be calculated whilst in this mode by pressing (Calc) (F3). Enter the cross
sectional area and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up,
down, left and right keys to highlight, set, test duration and pass/fail limit. The pass/fail
limit can be calculated whilst in this mode by pressing (Calc) (F3). Enter the cross
sectional area and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be
overridden by selecting the continuity limit from the list. Press
overridden by selecting the continuity limit from the list. Press
when complete.
button (F4)
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
when complete.
button (F4)
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Note: switching off the Rigel 288 will not cancel the ‘probe zero’
Note: switching off the Rigel 288 will not cancel the ‘probe zero’
Fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT socket. Connect the Earth Bond lead to the
appliance metal part. Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for
a preset test duration. To end the test before the test time expires press the red STOP
key.
Fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT socket. Connect the Earth Bond lead to the
appliance metal part. Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for
a preset test duration. To end the test before the test time expires press the red STOP
key.
This test can also be used to test the earth bond resistance within an IEC power lead.
Connect the IEC power lead between the EUT power socket and IEC socket on the
rear panel of the Rigel 288 and commence the test.
This test can also be used to test the earth bond resistance within an IEC power lead.
Connect the IEC power lead between the EUT power socket and IEC socket on the
rear panel of the Rigel 288 and commence the test.
Note: The Rigel 288 display will show real time measurements during an Earth
Continuity test.
Note: The Rigel 288 display will show real time measurements during an Earth
Continuity test.
The reading shown at the end of the test is the peak value recorded during
the test. This can be used to detect momentary break in the earth path e.g.
damaged power cords or loose mains plug connections.
The reading shown at the end of the test is the peak value recorded during
the test. This can be used to detect momentary break in the earth path e.g.
damaged power cords or loose mains plug connections.
A Pass or Fail is determined by comparing the peak value measured during
the test with the pre-set continuity limit.
.
A Pass or Fail is determined by comparing the peak value measured during
the test with the pre-set continuity limit.
.
5.1.2. Insulation Resistance EUT
5.1.2. Insulation Resistance EUT
This test is applicable to all Class I and Class II equipment, typically used as part of
MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
59
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
This test is applicable to all Class I and Class II equipment, typically used as part of
MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
59
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
This test will check that the connection between the earth pin in the mains plug of the
appliance and the metal casing of the appliance is satisfactory and of sufficiently low
resistance.
This test will check that the connection between the earth pin in the mains plug of the
appliance and the metal casing of the appliance is satisfactory and of sufficiently low
resistance.
A DC test current of ±200mA is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug
and the earth bond test lead clip/probe. The worst-case result is shown on the display.
A DC test current of ±200mA is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug
and the earth bond test lead clip/probe. The worst-case result is shown on the display.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up,
down, left and right keys to highlight, set, test duration and pass/fail limit. The pass/fail
limit can be calculated whilst in this mode by pressing (Calc) (F3). Enter the cross
sectional area and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up,
down, left and right keys to highlight, set, test duration and pass/fail limit. The pass/fail
limit can be calculated whilst in this mode by pressing (Calc) (F3). Enter the cross
sectional area and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be
overridden by selecting the continuity limit from the list. Press
overridden by selecting the continuity limit from the list. Press
when complete.
button (F4)
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
when complete.
button (F4)
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Note: switching off the Rigel 288 will not cancel the ‘probe zero’
Note: switching off the Rigel 288 will not cancel the ‘probe zero’
Fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT socket. Connect the Earth Bond lead to the
appliance metal part. Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for
a preset test duration. To end the test before the test time expires press the red STOP
key.
Fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT socket. Connect the Earth Bond lead to the
appliance metal part. Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for
a preset test duration. To end the test before the test time expires press the red STOP
key.
This test can also be used to test the earth bond resistance within an IEC power lead.
Connect the IEC power lead between the EUT power socket and IEC socket on the
rear panel of the Rigel 288 and commence the test.
This test can also be used to test the earth bond resistance within an IEC power lead.
Connect the IEC power lead between the EUT power socket and IEC socket on the
rear panel of the Rigel 288 and commence the test.
Note: The Rigel 288 display will show real time measurements during an Earth
Continuity test.
Note: The Rigel 288 display will show real time measurements during an Earth
Continuity test.
The reading shown at the end of the test is the peak value recorded during
the test. This can be used to detect momentary break in the earth path e.g.
damaged power cords or loose mains plug connections.
The reading shown at the end of the test is the peak value recorded during
the test. This can be used to detect momentary break in the earth path e.g.
damaged power cords or loose mains plug connections.
A Pass or Fail is determined by comparing the peak value measured during
the test with the pre-set continuity limit.
.
A Pass or Fail is determined by comparing the peak value measured during
the test with the pre-set continuity limit.
.
5.1.2. Insulation Resistance EUT
5.1.2. Insulation Resistance EUT
This test is applicable to all Class I and Class II equipment, typically used as part of
MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
59
This test is applicable to all Class I and Class II equipment, typically used as part of
MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
59
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
This test is used to verify that the mains supply pins are adequately insulated from
earth (Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
This test is used to verify that the mains supply pins are adequately insulated from
earth (Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin and both the live
and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply plug.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin and both the live
and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply plug.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
button (F3) will exit
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT
socket. For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT
socket. For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
60
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
60
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
This test is used to verify that the mains supply pins are adequately insulated from
earth (Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
This test is used to verify that the mains supply pins are adequately insulated from
earth (Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin and both the live
and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply plug.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin and both the live
and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply plug.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
button (F3) will exit
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT
socket. For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT
socket. For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
60
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
60
5.1.3. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts
5.1.3. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from earth
(Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from earth
(Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin (Class I) or the
enclosure (Class II) and all the Applied Parts combined.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin (Class I) or the
enclosure (Class II) and all the Applied Parts combined.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
the Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
the Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
61
5.1.3. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
61
5.1.3. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button (F3) will exit
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of MDA DB 9801 and IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from earth
(Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from earth
(Class I) or the enclosure (Class II).
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin (Class I) or the
enclosure (Class II) and all the Applied Parts combined.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between the earth pin (Class I) or the
enclosure (Class II) and all the Applied Parts combined.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
the Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
the Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
61
button (F3) will exit
Press the class button (F2) to set the class of the appliance under test. For a class II
appliance the probe symbol will be displayed at the top of the LCD display.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
61
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance. Press the
green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red
STOP key is pressed.
5.1.4. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains
5.1.4. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance. Press the
green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red
STOP key is pressed.
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from the
mains parts.
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from the
mains parts.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between all the Applied Parts
combined and both the live and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply
plug.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between all the Applied Parts
combined and both the live and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply
plug.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.5. Equipment Leakage (Direct)
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.5. Equipment Leakage (Direct)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
62
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance. Press the
green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red
STOP key is pressed.
5.1.4. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
62
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For Class 2 appliances only connect the Earth Bond lead to the appliance. Press the
green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red
STOP key is pressed.
5.1.4. Insulation Resistance Applied Parts to Mains
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button (F3) will exit
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II BF and CF equipment only, typically used
as part of IEC 62353 test routines.
Press the F1
button to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger.
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from the
mains parts.
This test is used to verify that the Applied Parts are adequately insulated from the
mains parts.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between all the Applied Parts
combined and both the live and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply
plug.
During this test, 500V D.C. is applied between all the Applied Parts
combined and both the live and neutral pins of the appliance mains supply
plug.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing the
Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.5. Equipment Leakage (Direct)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F3) will exit
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.5. Equipment Leakage (Direct)
62
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
62
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
63
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
63
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
63
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
63
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
Press
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL* Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL* Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Note
Note
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.6. Equipment Leakage (Differential)
5.1.6. Equipment Leakage (Differential)
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Press
64
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Press the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Press
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
64
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL* Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL* Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Note
Note
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.6. Equipment Leakage (Differential)
5.1.6. Equipment Leakage (Differential)
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
64
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
64
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
Press
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Note
Note
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module since the
Rigel 288 will short all 10 connections together as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module since the
Rigel 288 will short all 10 connections together as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
65
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
65
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, and RMS Pass/Fail limit. Use the
arrow keys to highlight and set. Press the
the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
Press
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Note
Note
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module since the
Rigel 288 will short all 10 connections together as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module since the
Rigel 288 will short all 10 connections together as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
65
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
65
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.7. Equipment Leakage (Alternative)
5.1.7. Equipment Leakage (Alternative)
This method is similar to the dielectric test between the mains parts shortened
together and the Applied Parts/accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive)
connected together.
This method is similar to the dielectric test between the mains parts shortened
together and the Applied Parts/accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive)
connected together.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
button (F3) will exit
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Note
Note
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
66
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
66
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.7. Equipment Leakage (Alternative)
5.1.7. Equipment Leakage (Alternative)
This method is similar to the dielectric test between the mains parts shortened
together and the Applied Parts/accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive)
connected together.
This method is similar to the dielectric test between the mains parts shortened
together and the Applied Parts/accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive)
connected together.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
This test is applicable to Class I and Class II B, BF and CF equipment. This is an IEC
62353 test. For a complete description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits,
please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Insulation test voltage (500 /
Press
250VDC) and Pass/Fail limit. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
Press
button (F4) when complete. Pressing
Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F3) will exit
button (F3) will exit
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect ALL Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module and fit the Appliance mains plug into the EUT outlet.
Note
Note
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
66
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts are grouped together which
eliminates the requirement to configure the Applied Part Module as the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
66
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.8. Applied Part Leakage (Direct)
5.1.8. Applied Part Leakage (Direct)
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to class I and class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to class I and class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
67
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
67
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
Rigel 288 will short together all 10 connections as part of this test. For this
reason, the Applied Part configuration key is not available.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive part of the enclosure. For measurements on conductive non-earthed
parts, the test needs to be repeated using the same probe.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.8. Applied Part Leakage (Direct)
5.1.8. Applied Part Leakage (Direct)
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to class I and class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to class I and class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
67
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
67
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F1) in the Settings
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.9. Applied Part Leakage (Alternative)
5.1.9. Applied Part Leakage (Alternative)
This method is similar to a dielectric test between the Applied Part and all mains
parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
This method is similar to a dielectric test between the Applied Part and all mains
parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Class I and Class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Class I and Class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
68
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
68
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
Press the
button (F2) to change the mains polarity.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F1) in the Settings
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.9. Applied Part Leakage (Alternative)
5.1.9. Applied Part Leakage (Alternative)
This method is similar to a dielectric test between the Applied Part and all mains
parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
This method is similar to a dielectric test between the Applied Part and all mains
parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Class I and Class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Class I and Class II floating type (BF &
CF) Applied Parts. This is an IEC 62353 test. For a complete description of this test
and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix C & D.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
68
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
68
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F1) in the Settings
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Press the
69
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Press the
69
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
button (F3) to set the Test Duration, Equipment Class, Applied Part
Press
module and RMS Pass/Fail limit for BF and CF Applied Parts. Use the up, down. left
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
and right keys to highlight and set. Press
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F1) in the Settings
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class I equipment use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
a conductive non-earthed part.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices use the earth bond lead (from the green socket) and connect to
the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
69
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
69
5.1.10.
Earth Leakage Test
5.1.10.
Mains voltage applied to EUT
Earth Leakage Test
Mains voltage applied to EUT
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
appliance into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important as it
demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
appliance into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important as it
demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1test. For a complete description of this test and
applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1test. For a complete description of this test and
applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5.1.10.
70
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Earth Leakage Test
5.1.10.
Mains voltage applied to EUT
70
Earth Leakage Test
Mains voltage applied to EUT
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
appliance into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important as it
demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
appliance into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important as it
demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1test. For a complete description of this test and
applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1test. For a complete description of this test and
applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
70
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down. left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
70
Plug the Medical Device in the Rigel 288 EUT socket and press the green START key
to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red STOP key is
pressed.
5.1.11.
Enclosure Leakage Test
Plug the Medical Device in the Rigel 288 EUT socket and press the green START key
to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red STOP key is
pressed.
5.1.11.
Warning Mains voltage applied to EUT
Enclosure Leakage Test
Warning Mains voltage applied to EUT
Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person came into contact
with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or care) of the
appliance.
Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person came into contact
with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or care) of the
appliance.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF Applied Parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF Applied Parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
71
Plug the Medical Device in the Rigel 288 EUT socket and press the green START key
to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red STOP key is
pressed.
5.1.11.
Enclosure Leakage Test
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Plug the Medical Device in the Rigel 288 EUT socket and press the green START key
to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or until the red STOP key is
pressed.
5.1.11.
Warning Mains voltage applied to EUT
71
Enclosure Leakage Test
Warning Mains voltage applied to EUT
Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person came into contact
with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or care) of the
appliance.
Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person came into contact
with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or care) of the
appliance.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF Applied Parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF Applied Parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
71
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
71
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
For Class I equipment, connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to a
conductive part on the enclosure. Measure Enclosure Leakage on conductive nonearthed parts separately, by repositioning the probe.
For Class I equipment, connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to a
conductive part on the enclosure. Measure Enclosure Leakage on conductive nonearthed parts separately, by repositioning the probe.
For Class II devices connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to the
conductive parts on the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to the
conductive parts on the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.12.
Patient Leakage
Warning
5.1.12.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Patient Leakage
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete description of this
test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete description of this
test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Press
72
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Press
72
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
For Class I equipment, connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to a
conductive part on the enclosure. Measure Enclosure Leakage on conductive nonearthed parts separately, by repositioning the probe.
For Class I equipment, connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to a
conductive part on the enclosure. Measure Enclosure Leakage on conductive nonearthed parts separately, by repositioning the probe.
For Class II devices connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to the
conductive parts on the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
For Class II devices connect the earth bond lead (from the green socket) to the
conductive parts on the enclosure preferably encapsulated within conductive foil.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.12.
Warning
Patient Leakage
5.1.12.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Patient Leakage
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete description of this
test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete description of this
test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
72
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
72
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
Press
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
Press
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
73
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
73
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
73
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
73
5.1.13.
Warning
Patient Leakage – F-Type
5.1.13.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Warning !!! This test involves applying a current limited mains potential
(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to
the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in excess of 5mA
under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the user.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is
via a limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
Patient Leakage – F-Type
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning !!! This test involves applying a current limited mains potential
(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to
the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in excess of 5mA
under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the user.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is
via a limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with BF and /
or CF applied parts and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source
voltage normal or reverse conditions. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with BF and /
or CF applied parts and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source
voltage normal or reverse conditions. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5.1.13.
Warning
74
Patient Leakage – F-Type
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5.1.13.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Warning !!! This test involves applying a current limited mains potential
(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to
the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in excess of 5mA
under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the user.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is
via a limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
74
Patient Leakage – F-Type
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning !!! This test involves applying a current limited mains potential
(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to
the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in excess of 5mA
under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the user.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is
via a limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with BF and /
or CF applied parts and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source
voltage normal or reverse conditions. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with BF and /
or CF applied parts and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source
voltage normal or reverse conditions. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
74
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
74
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.14.
Patient Auxiliary Current
Warning
5.1.14.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Patient Auxiliary Current
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
75
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
75
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press the
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
and mains reversal.
Press
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.14.
Warning
Patient Auxiliary Current
5.1.14.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Patient Auxiliary Current
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and Class II equipment with
Types B, BF and CF applied parts. This is an IEC 60601-1 test. For a complete
description of this test and applicable pass / fail limits, please see Appendix A & B.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
75
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
75
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
Press the
and mains reversal.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
Press
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
Press the
and mains reversal.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
Press
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
76
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
76
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never leave the earth bond, or any other probe attached to any
moving parts.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Warning – never touch the appliance under test whilst testing is in
progress. Doing so could result in injury due to electric shock and / or
sudden movement of any mechanical parts on the appliance.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Refer to page 7 for notes on precautions required for compliance with the
relevant safety standards.
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
Do not exceed the maximum permitted voltage of 30 V AC/DC
with respect to earth potential! Electric Shock danger!
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
Press the
and mains reversal.
button (F2) to toggle between the different single fault conditions
Press the
and mains reversal.
Press
Press
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
button (F3) to set the Test Duration and RMS Pass/Fail limit using the
up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To configure the Applied Part Module press the
menu. For instructions on using this feature, see 3.2.2
button (F1) in the Settings
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
For both Class 1and Class II appliances, connect the Patient Connections or Applied
Parts to the Applied Part Module as per the configuration above.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
76
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
76
5.1.15.
Load Test
Warning
5.1.15.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Load Test
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
This test provides a means of testing the Load current (in Amps) and power in KVA.
This test provides a means of testing the Load current (in Amps) and power in KVA.
Press the
Press the
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
button (F3) to set the Test Duration. Press
Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.16.
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration. Press
Pressing the
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
5.1.16.
Warning
IEC Lead
This test provides a means of testing the Load current (in Amps) and power in KVA.
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Press the
button (F3) to set the Test Duration. Press
Press
Pressing the
77
(F4) when complete.
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Warning
This test provides means of testing the continuity, insulation and polarity* of IEC test
leads.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
5.1.16.
Mains voltage applied to IEC Lead.
77
Load Test
Warning
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
Mains voltage applied to IEC Lead.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
5.1.15.
This test provides a means of testing the Load current (in Amps) and power in KVA.
Press
IEC Lead
This test provides means of testing the continuity, insulation and polarity* of IEC test
leads.
Load Test
Warning
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
Warning
77
(F4) when complete.
Press the green START key to begin the test. The test will run for the duration set or
until the red STOP key is pressed.
Mains voltage applied to IEC Lead.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Press the
Pressing the
5.1.16.
This test provides means of testing the continuity, insulation and polarity* of IEC test
leads.
5.1.15.
button (F3) to set the Test Duration. Press
Press
IEC Lead
Warning
button (F1) to obtain the schematic representation of this test:
IEC Lead
Mains voltage applied to IEC Lead.
This test provides means of testing the continuity, insulation and polarity* of IEC test
leads.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
77
Press
button (F3) to set the Pass/Fail limits for Continuity, Insulation and Test
Voltage. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. The pass/fail limit
for the continuity stage can be calculated using the Calc button (F2). Enter the type
and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be overridden by
Press
button (F3) to set the Pass/Fail limits for Continuity, Insulation and Test
Voltage. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. The pass/fail limit
for the continuity stage can be calculated using the Calc button (F2). Enter the type
and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be overridden by
selecting the limit from the list. Press
selecting the limit from the list. Press
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To perform an IEC lead test, connect the IEC socket side of the lead into the IEC inlet
plug of the Rigel 288. Connect the mains plug side of the lead into the EUT socket, of
the Rigel 288.
To perform an IEC lead test, connect the IEC socket side of the lead into the IEC inlet
plug of the Rigel 288. Connect the mains plug side of the lead into the EUT socket, of
the Rigel 288.
To start the IEC lead test, press the green START key.
To start the IEC lead test, press the green START key.
The earth continuity resistance for the lead is measured using a ±200mA test current.
The display indicates the highest resistance and the pass/fail status. If this resistance
is less than the pass/fail limit, then the insulation resistance will be measured.
The earth continuity resistance for the lead is measured using a ±200mA test current.
The display indicates the highest resistance and the pass/fail status. If this resistance
is less than the pass/fail limit, then the insulation resistance will be measured.
During an insulation resistance measurement, a high voltage is
applied between Live/Neutral and Earth of the IEC lead.
During an insulation resistance measurement, a high voltage is
applied between Live/Neutral and Earth of the IEC lead.
The insulation resistance of the lead is measured over a period of 2 seconds. The
display shows the final reading and the pass/fail status. If the insulation resistance is
greater than the pass/fail limit, then the lead polarity will be checked.
The insulation resistance of the lead is measured over a period of 2 seconds. The
display shows the final reading and the pass/fail status. If the insulation resistance is
greater than the pass/fail limit, then the lead polarity will be checked.
The lead polarity stage checks for short and open circuit conditions on the live and
neutral conductors. It also checks that the live and neutral wires are not crossed. When
testing non-polarised IEC leads (e.g. Schuko mains leads) Live and Neutral can be
crossed without implications. As such, this feature can be excluded. See section 3.4.6.
The lead polarity stage checks for short and open circuit conditions on the live and
neutral conductors. It also checks that the live and neutral wires are not crossed. When
testing non-polarised IEC leads (e.g. Schuko mains leads) Live and Neutral can be
crossed without implications. As such, this feature can be excluded. See section 3.4.6.
The polarity test is performed at mains voltage.
The polarity test is performed at mains voltage.
The display shows the final result and the pass/fail status. See below.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
The display shows the final result and the pass/fail status. See below.
78
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
78
Press
button (F3) to set the Pass/Fail limits for Continuity, Insulation and Test
Voltage. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. The pass/fail limit
for the continuity stage can be calculated using the Calc button (F2). Enter the type
and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be overridden by
Press
button (F3) to set the Pass/Fail limits for Continuity, Insulation and Test
Voltage. Use the up, down, left and right keys to highlight and set. The pass/fail limit
for the continuity stage can be calculated using the Calc button (F2). Enter the type
and length of cable and a new limit will be calculated. This can be overridden by
selecting the limit from the list. Press
selecting the limit from the list. Press
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
(F4) when complete. Pressing the
button (F3) will exit Settings mode without saving changes.
To perform an IEC lead test, connect the IEC socket side of the lead into the IEC inlet
plug of the Rigel 288. Connect the mains plug side of the lead into the EUT socket, of
the Rigel 288.
To perform an IEC lead test, connect the IEC socket side of the lead into the IEC inlet
plug of the Rigel 288. Connect the mains plug side of the lead into the EUT socket, of
the Rigel 288.
To start the IEC lead test, press the green START key.
To start the IEC lead test, press the green START key.
The earth continuity resistance for the lead is measured using a ±200mA test current.
The display indicates the highest resistance and the pass/fail status. If this resistance
is less than the pass/fail limit, then the insulation resistance will be measured.
The earth continuity resistance for the lead is measured using a ±200mA test current.
The display indicates the highest resistance and the pass/fail status. If this resistance
is less than the pass/fail limit, then the insulation resistance will be measured.
During an insulation resistance measurement, a high voltage is
applied between Live/Neutral and Earth of the IEC lead.
During an insulation resistance measurement, a high voltage is
applied between Live/Neutral and Earth of the IEC lead.
The insulation resistance of the lead is measured over a period of 2 seconds. The
display shows the final reading and the pass/fail status. If the insulation resistance is
greater than the pass/fail limit, then the lead polarity will be checked.
The insulation resistance of the lead is measured over a period of 2 seconds. The
display shows the final reading and the pass/fail status. If the insulation resistance is
greater than the pass/fail limit, then the lead polarity will be checked.
The lead polarity stage checks for short and open circuit conditions on the live and
neutral conductors. It also checks that the live and neutral wires are not crossed. When
testing non-polarised IEC leads (e.g. Schuko mains leads) Live and Neutral can be
crossed without implications. As such, this feature can be excluded. See section 3.4.6.
The lead polarity stage checks for short and open circuit conditions on the live and
neutral conductors. It also checks that the live and neutral wires are not crossed. When
testing non-polarised IEC leads (e.g. Schuko mains leads) Live and Neutral can be
crossed without implications. As such, this feature can be excluded. See section 3.4.6.
The polarity test is performed at mains voltage.
The polarity test is performed at mains voltage.
The display shows the final result and the pass/fail status. See below.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
The display shows the final result and the pass/fail status. See below.
78
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
78
6. View Data
To view the stored data, press the
menu.
6. View Data
button (F4) and select View Data from the
To view the stored data, press the
menu.
button (F4) and select View Data from the
The following screen provides an overview of all available records in the memory,
identified by Asset ID, Site and Pass or Fail.
The following screen provides an overview of all available records in the memory,
identified by Asset ID, Site and Pass or Fail.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the database. When the desired
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the database. When the desired
record is highlighted, press the
data.
record is highlighted, press the
data.
button (F4) to enter the record and view the
This will display the Test Details Screen
Use the
This will display the Test Details Screen
button (F2) to return to the main View Data screen.
Use the
button (F3) to view the Trace Variable and again to view the Applied Part
Use the
setup. See below.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
79
6. View Data
To view the stored data, press the
menu.
button (F4) to enter the record and view the
button (F2) to return to the main View Data screen.
button (F3) to view the Trace Variable and again to view the Applied Part
Use the
setup. See below.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
79
6. View Data
button (F4) and select View Data from the
To view the stored data, press the
menu.
button (F4) and select View Data from the
The following screen provides an overview of all available records in the memory,
identified by Asset ID, Site and Pass or Fail.
The following screen provides an overview of all available records in the memory,
identified by Asset ID, Site and Pass or Fail.
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the database. When the desired
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the database. When the desired
record is highlighted, press the
data.
record is highlighted, press the
data.
button (F4) to enter the record and view the
This will display the Test Details Screen
Use the
This will display the Test Details Screen
button (F2) to return to the main View Data screen.
Use the
button (F3) to view the Trace Variable and again to view the Applied Part
Use the
setup. See below.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F4) to enter the record and view the
79
button (F2) to return to the main View Data screen.
button (F3) to view the Trace Variable and again to view the Applied Part
Use the
setup. See below.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
79
In the Test Details screen, press the
−
−
−
−
−
−
button (F4) to view the following options:
View Results will display the results of the test (see section 6.1)
View Sequence will display the test Sequence
User Comment will allow the user to enter comments if required
Print Result will print the result on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer pass/fail label. (see section 4.2 for
more information)
6.1.
Us the
View Results
In the Test Details screen, press the
−
−
−
−
−
−
View Results will display the results of the test (see section 6.1)
View Sequence will display the test Sequence
User Comment will allow the user to enter comments if required
Print Result will print the result on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer pass/fail label. (see section 4.2 for
more information)
6.1.
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
button (F4) to view the following options:
Us the
View Results
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
button (F4) provides the user with extra options to print results, print labels,
The
Test ‘n tag print or view results.
button (F4) provides the user with extra options to print results, print labels,
The
Test ‘n tag print or view results.
Use the up and down keys to select the view results option. Press the
(F4) to display the view text results screen (see below).
Use the up and down keys to select the view results option. Press the
(F4) to display the view text results screen (see below).
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
In the Test Details screen, press the
−
−
−
−
−
−
80
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F4) to view the following options:
View Results will display the results of the test (see section 6.1)
View Sequence will display the test Sequence
User Comment will allow the user to enter comments if required
Print Result will print the result on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer pass/fail label. (see section 4.2 for
more information)
6.1.
Us the
button
View Results
In the Test Details screen, press the
−
−
−
−
−
−
Us the
80
button (F4) to view the following options:
View Results will display the results of the test (see section 6.1)
View Sequence will display the test Sequence
User Comment will allow the user to enter comments if required
Print Result will print the result on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Print Label will print a pass/fail label on the thermal printer (50 mm roll)
Test ‘n Tag will produce a thermal transfer pass/fail label. (see section 4.2 for
more information)
6.1.
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
button
View Results
button (F2) to return to the Test Details screen.
The
button (F4) provides the user with extra options to print results, print labels,
Test ‘n tag print or view results.
The
button (F4) provides the user with extra options to print results, print labels,
Test ‘n tag print or view results.
Use the up and down keys to select the view results option. Press the
(F4) to display the view text results screen (see below).
Use the up and down keys to select the view results option. Press the
(F4) to display the view text results screen (see below).
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button
80
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button
80
Use the
6.2.
button (F2) to return to main menu.
Use the
Search the database
From the main View Data screen, press the
6.2.
button (F1).
button (F2) to return to main menu.
Search the database
From the main View Data screen, press the
button (F1).
Use the up, down, left and right keys to navigate this screen.
Use the up, down, left and right keys to navigate this screen.
The default setting is ‘*’ which includes all records that Passed.
To search for more specific criteria, fill in the required fields by either using the
keyboard or drop down boxes.
The default setting is ‘*’ which includes all records that Passed.
To search for more specific criteria, fill in the required fields by either using the
keyboard or drop down boxes.
Note
Note
The entered data must be identical to the data stored with the test. This
includes visible and invisible SPACE characters.
For Date entry use format DDMMYYYY or DD MM YYYY. For example for
31st October 2007 us 31102007.
Test Status Allows the user to select search criteria based on PASSED, FAILED or
UPLOADED items.
To start the search, press the
screen.
button (F4) or the
button (F3) to leave this
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Use the
6.2.
81
button (F2) to return to main menu.
For Date entry use format DDMMYYYY or DD MM YYYY. For example for
31st October 2007 us 31102007.
Test Status Allows the user to select search criteria based on PASSED, FAILED or
UPLOADED items.
To start the search, press the
screen.
6.2.
button (F1).
button (F4) or the
button (F3) to leave this
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Use the
Search the database
From the main View Data screen, press the
The entered data must be identical to the data stored with the test. This
includes visible and invisible SPACE characters.
81
button (F2) to return to main menu.
Search the database
From the main View Data screen, press the
button (F1).
Use the up, down, left and right keys to navigate this screen.
Use the up, down, left and right keys to navigate this screen.
The default setting is ‘*’ which includes all records that Passed.
To search for more specific criteria, fill in the required fields by either using the
keyboard or drop down boxes.
The default setting is ‘*’ which includes all records that Passed.
To search for more specific criteria, fill in the required fields by either using the
keyboard or drop down boxes.
Note
Note
The entered data must be identical to the data stored with the test. This
includes visible and invisible SPACE characters.
For Date entry use format DDMMYYYY or DD MM YYYY. For example for
31st October 2007 us 31102007.
Test Status Allows the user to select search criteria based on PASSED, FAILED or
UPLOADED items.
To start the search, press the
screen.
button (F4) or the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F3) to leave this
81
The entered data must be identical to the data stored with the test. This
includes visible and invisible SPACE characters.
For Date entry use format DDMMYYYY or DD MM YYYY. For example for
31st October 2007 us 31102007.
Test Status Allows the user to select search criteria based on PASSED, FAILED or
UPLOADED items.
To start the search, press the
screen.
button (F4) or the
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
button (F3) to leave this
81
6.3.
View Data Options
6.3.
From the main View Data screen, press the
button (F2).
View Data Options
From the main View Data screen, press the
This will present an options menu to allow
the user to:
Print All Labels – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the Test ‘n Tag
printer, setup in Bluetooth favourites.
Download to PC – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the PC, setup in
Bluetooth favourites.
Delete Single Asset – Will delete the single
selected record.
Delete All Assets – Will delete all records
from the memory (this action is irreversible).
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
6.3.
82
View Data Options
This will present an options menu to allow
the user to:
Print All Labels – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the Test ‘n Tag
printer, setup in Bluetooth favourites.
Download to PC – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the PC, setup in
Bluetooth favourites.
Delete Single Asset – Will delete the single
selected record.
Delete All Assets – Will delete all records
from the memory (this action is irreversible).
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
6.3.
From the main View Data screen, press the
button (F2).
Print All Labels – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the Test ‘n Tag
printer, setup in Bluetooth favourites.
Download to PC – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the PC, setup in
Bluetooth favourites.
Delete Single Asset – Will delete the single
selected record.
Delete All Assets – Will delete all records
from the memory (this action is irreversible).
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
82
82
View Data Options
From the main View Data screen, press the
This will present an options menu to allow
the user to:
button (F2).
button (F2).
This will present an options menu to allow
the user to:
Print All Labels – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the Test ‘n Tag
printer, setup in Bluetooth favourites.
Download to PC – Will download all records
within the search criteria to the PC, setup in
Bluetooth favourites.
Delete Single Asset – Will delete the single
selected record.
Delete All Assets – Will delete all records
from the memory (this action is irreversible).
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
82
7. Data Transfer
7. Data Transfer
Data transfer is used to transfer records and configuration data to and from a PC load
a logo in bitmap format for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’ Tag print system, and clone
data.
Data transfer is used to transfer records and configuration data to and from a PC load
a logo in bitmap format for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’ Tag print system, and clone
data.
The Data Transfer functions are accessed by pressing the
The Data Transfer functions are accessed by pressing the
Data Transfer using the up and down keys and pressing the
7.1.
button (F4), selecting
button (F4).
Download to PC
Data Transfer using the up and down keys and pressing the
7.1.
button (F4), selecting
button (F4).
Download to PC
This feature is used to download records to a PC. Select Download to PC and press
This feature is used to download records to a PC. Select Download to PC and press
the
button (F4) to accept. The Rigel 288 will now attempt to make a Bluetooth
connection with the Computer that has been configured in the Bluetooth Favourites.
the
button (F4) to accept. The Rigel 288 will now attempt to make a Bluetooth
connection with the Computer that has been configured in the Bluetooth Favourites.
Initially, the Bluetooth status icon will display the egg timer for a few seconds, as
shown on the left, while the connection is established. When the connection is
established and ready to communicate the Bluetooth status icon will change to show
the Bluetooth icon as shown on the right.
Initially, the Bluetooth status icon will display the egg timer for a few seconds, as
shown on the left, while the connection is established. When the connection is
established and ready to communicate the Bluetooth status icon will change to show
the Bluetooth icon as shown on the right.
The Rigel 288 is able to download in a number of formats to suit individual
The Rigel 288 is able to download in a number of formats to suit individual
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
83
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
83
7. Data Transfer
7. Data Transfer
Data transfer is used to transfer records and configuration data to and from a PC load
a logo in bitmap format for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’ Tag print system, and clone
data.
Data transfer is used to transfer records and configuration data to and from a PC load
a logo in bitmap format for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’ Tag print system, and clone
data.
The Data Transfer functions are accessed by pressing the
The Data Transfer functions are accessed by pressing the
Data Transfer using the up and down keys and pressing the
7.1.
button (F4), selecting
button (F4).
Download to PC
Data Transfer using the up and down keys and pressing the
7.1.
button (F4), selecting
button (F4).
Download to PC
This feature is used to download records to a PC. Select Download to PC and press
This feature is used to download records to a PC. Select Download to PC and press
the
button (F4) to accept. The Rigel 288 will now attempt to make a Bluetooth
connection with the Computer that has been configured in the Bluetooth Favourites.
the
button (F4) to accept. The Rigel 288 will now attempt to make a Bluetooth
connection with the Computer that has been configured in the Bluetooth Favourites.
Initially, the Bluetooth status icon will display the egg timer for a few seconds, as
shown on the left, while the connection is established. When the connection is
established and ready to communicate the Bluetooth status icon will change to show
the Bluetooth icon as shown on the right.
Initially, the Bluetooth status icon will display the egg timer for a few seconds, as
shown on the left, while the connection is established. When the connection is
established and ready to communicate the Bluetooth status icon will change to show
the Bluetooth icon as shown on the right.
The Rigel 288 is able to download in a number of formats to suit individual
The Rigel 288 is able to download in a number of formats to suit individual
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
83
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
83
requirements. These are;
•
•
•
requirements. These are;
•
•
•
CSV Full (Comma Separate Value, download only)
CSV Summary (Comma Separate Value, download only)
Rigel SSS (Up and download format)
CSV Full (Comma Separate Value, download only)
CSV Summary (Comma Separate Value, download only)
Rigel SSS (Up and download format)
Toggle between the options by using the left and right arrow keys.
Toggle between the options by using the left and right arrow keys.
The Rigel 288 is now ready to transfer data. The No. of assets field shows the number
of records that will be downloaded. Ensure that the PC application is ready to receive
data then press the Send button (F4).
The Rigel 288 is now ready to transfer data. The No. of assets field shows the number
of records that will be downloaded. Ensure that the PC application is ready to receive
data then press the Send button (F4).
A progress bar, as shown below, will now follow the data transfer until download is
complete.
A progress bar, as shown below, will now follow the data transfer until download is
complete.
Note
7.2.
To download a selection of the database, refer to “View Data”
(section 6). Search on the required criteria then select “download to
pc” from the options menu.
Upload from PC
Note
7.2.
To download a selection of the database, refer to “View Data”
(section 6). Search on the required criteria then select “download to
pc” from the options menu.
Upload from PC
This feature is only available when used in combination with the new Med-eBase PC
software and when the SSS format is activated on your device.
This feature is only available when used in combination with the new Med-eBase PC
software and when the SSS format is activated on your device.
Select the Upload from PC option from the Data Transfer menu. The Rigel 288 will now
attempt to establish a Bluetooth connection to the PC as previously described in
Download to PC. The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive upload data from a PC. Refer
to the Instruction manual of MediGuard plus on how to transmit data from the PC.
Select the Upload from PC option from the Data Transfer menu. The Rigel 288 will now
attempt to establish a Bluetooth connection to the PC as previously described in
Download to PC. The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive upload data from a PC. Refer
to the Instruction manual of MediGuard plus on how to transmit data from the PC.
To activate the .SSS format on your Rigel 288 tester, please download the SSS
Application note from our knowledge base.
To activate the .SSS format on your Rigel 288 tester, please download the SSS
Application note from our knowledge base.
Please visit; www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
Please visit; www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
84
requirements. These are;
•
•
•
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
84
requirements. These are;
•
•
•
CSV Full (Comma Separate Value, download only)
CSV Summary (Comma Separate Value, download only)
Rigel SSS (Up and download format)
CSV Full (Comma Separate Value, download only)
CSV Summary (Comma Separate Value, download only)
Rigel SSS (Up and download format)
Toggle between the options by using the left and right arrow keys.
Toggle between the options by using the left and right arrow keys.
The Rigel 288 is now ready to transfer data. The No. of assets field shows the number
of records that will be downloaded. Ensure that the PC application is ready to receive
data then press the Send button (F4).
The Rigel 288 is now ready to transfer data. The No. of assets field shows the number
of records that will be downloaded. Ensure that the PC application is ready to receive
data then press the Send button (F4).
A progress bar, as shown below, will now follow the data transfer until download is
complete.
A progress bar, as shown below, will now follow the data transfer until download is
complete.
Note
7.2.
To download a selection of the database, refer to “View Data”
(section 6). Search on the required criteria then select “download to
pc” from the options menu.
Upload from PC
Note
7.2.
To download a selection of the database, refer to “View Data”
(section 6). Search on the required criteria then select “download to
pc” from the options menu.
Upload from PC
This feature is only available when used in combination with the new Med-eBase PC
software and when the SSS format is activated on your device.
This feature is only available when used in combination with the new Med-eBase PC
software and when the SSS format is activated on your device.
Select the Upload from PC option from the Data Transfer menu. The Rigel 288 will now
attempt to establish a Bluetooth connection to the PC as previously described in
Download to PC. The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive upload data from a PC. Refer
to the Instruction manual of MediGuard plus on how to transmit data from the PC.
Select the Upload from PC option from the Data Transfer menu. The Rigel 288 will now
attempt to establish a Bluetooth connection to the PC as previously described in
Download to PC. The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive upload data from a PC. Refer
to the Instruction manual of MediGuard plus on how to transmit data from the PC.
To activate the .SSS format on your Rigel 288 tester, please download the SSS
Application note from our knowledge base.
To activate the .SSS format on your Rigel 288 tester, please download the SSS
Application note from our knowledge base.
Please visit; www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
Please visit; www.rigelmedical.com/knowledgebase/
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
84
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
84
7.3.
Configuration Data
7.3.
This feature can be used to transfer store or modify the current Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comment lists to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel
288 units with identical Trace Variable, User Profile and Comment lists.
7.3.1. Send Config Data
To send configuration data from a PC, press the
Configuration Data
This feature can be used to transfer store or modify the current Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comment lists to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel
288 units with identical Trace Variable, User Profile and Comment lists.
7.3.1. Send Config Data
button (F4), and select Data
Transfer using the up and down arrow keys, select Data and press the
(F4).
button
To send configuration data from a PC, press the
button (F4), and select Data
Transfer using the up and down arrow keys, select Data and press the
(F4).
button
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in the Rigel 288 Bluetooth
Favourites. When a connection has been established the display will be as shown
below.
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in the Rigel 288 Bluetooth
Favourites. When a connection has been established the display will be as shown
below.
Open the Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) application on your PC and check
that the Com Port is correct for the Bluetooth USB adaptor being used with the P.C.
The baud rate will default to the correct value of 57600.
Open the Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) application on your PC and check
that the Com Port is correct for the Bluetooth USB adaptor being used with the P.C.
The baud rate will default to the correct value of 57600.
In the application, select Start Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar.
In the application, select Start Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar.
Enter a valid file name for the text file containing the download information; see below.
Enter a valid file name for the text file containing the download information; see below.
- See next page -
- See next page -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
7.3.
85
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Configuration Data
7.3.
This feature can be used to transfer store or modify the current Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comment lists to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel
288 units with identical Trace Variable, User Profile and Comment lists.
7.3.1. Send Config Data
To send configuration data from a PC, press the
85
Configuration Data
This feature can be used to transfer store or modify the current Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comment lists to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel
288 units with identical Trace Variable, User Profile and Comment lists.
7.3.1. Send Config Data
button (F4), and select Data
Transfer using the up and down arrow keys, select Data and press the
(F4).
button
To send configuration data from a PC, press the
button (F4), and select Data
Transfer using the up and down arrow keys, select Data and press the
(F4).
button
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in the Rigel 288 Bluetooth
Favourites. When a connection has been established the display will be as shown
below.
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in the Rigel 288 Bluetooth
Favourites. When a connection has been established the display will be as shown
below.
Open the Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) application on your PC and check
that the Com Port is correct for the Bluetooth USB adaptor being used with the P.C.
The baud rate will default to the correct value of 57600.
Open the Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) application on your PC and check
that the Com Port is correct for the Bluetooth USB adaptor being used with the P.C.
The baud rate will default to the correct value of 57600.
In the application, select Start Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar.
In the application, select Start Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar.
Enter a valid file name for the text file containing the download information; see below.
Enter a valid file name for the text file containing the download information; see below.
- See next page -
- See next page -
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
85
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
85
Once the text file has been created, press the Send button (F4) to transfer the Asset
Trace variables and User names from the Rigel 288 to the PC.
Once the text file has been created, press the Send button (F4) to transfer the Asset
Trace variables and User names from the Rigel 288 to the PC.
The downloaded text will appear in the Bluetooth Downloader screen. Select Stop
Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar. See below;
The downloaded text will appear in the Bluetooth Downloader screen. Select Stop
Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar. See below;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
86
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
86
Once the text file has been created, press the Send button (F4) to transfer the Asset
Trace variables and User names from the Rigel 288 to the PC.
Once the text file has been created, press the Send button (F4) to transfer the Asset
Trace variables and User names from the Rigel 288 to the PC.
The downloaded text will appear in the Bluetooth Downloader screen. Select Stop
Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar. See below;
The downloaded text will appear in the Bluetooth Downloader screen. Select Stop
Capture from the Capture menu in the task bar. See below;
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
86
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
86
Close down the Application and open the text file using word pad or equivalent.
Close down the Application and open the text file using word pad or equivalent.
The downloaded information can be used to ‘clone’ other Rigel 288’s or modified to
add additional trace variables. Again these can be uploaded to any Rigel 288 for
convenience.
The downloaded information can be used to ‘clone’ other Rigel 288’s or modified to
add additional trace variables. Again these can be uploaded to any Rigel 288 for
convenience.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal
capable of sending and receiving a text file.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal
capable of sending and receiving a text file.
Note: The maximum number of entries for each field is SiteName (40),
LocationName (50), UserName (40) and Comment (80).
Note: The maximum number of entries for each field is SiteName (40),
LocationName (50), UserName (40) and Comment (80).
7.3.2. Receive Config Data
7.3.2. Receive Config Data
Follow the steps above in Send Config Data to run the Bluetooth Downloader and
connect the Rigel 288 to your PC.
Follow the steps above in Send Config Data to run the Bluetooth Downloader and
connect the Rigel 288 to your PC.
Click on File on the Bluetooth Downloader menu and select Send File. This will open a
window allowing you to select the text file containing your Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comments configuration data. Select the require file and click on Open.
The Bluetooth Downloader will now transfer the configuration file to the Rigel 288.
Click on File on the Bluetooth Downloader menu and select Send File. This will open a
window allowing you to select the text file containing your Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comments configuration data. Select the require file and click on Open.
The Bluetooth Downloader will now transfer the configuration file to the Rigel 288.
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
If the transfer is not successful, check that the format of the configuration file exactly
matches that specified.
If the transfer is not successful, check that the format of the configuration file exactly
matches that specified.
Note: The Config file must be ASCII text and the last entry must be the [END]
statement.
Note: The Config file must be ASCII text and the last entry must be the [END]
statement.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
87
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
87
Close down the Application and open the text file using word pad or equivalent.
Close down the Application and open the text file using word pad or equivalent.
The downloaded information can be used to ‘clone’ other Rigel 288’s or modified to
add additional trace variables. Again these can be uploaded to any Rigel 288 for
convenience.
The downloaded information can be used to ‘clone’ other Rigel 288’s or modified to
add additional trace variables. Again these can be uploaded to any Rigel 288 for
convenience.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal
capable of sending and receiving a text file.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (Data Transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal
capable of sending and receiving a text file.
Note: The maximum number of entries for each field is SiteName (40),
LocationName (50), UserName (40) and Comment (80).
Note: The maximum number of entries for each field is SiteName (40),
LocationName (50), UserName (40) and Comment (80).
7.3.2. Receive Config Data
7.3.2. Receive Config Data
Follow the steps above in Send Config Data to run the Bluetooth Downloader and
connect the Rigel 288 to your PC.
Follow the steps above in Send Config Data to run the Bluetooth Downloader and
connect the Rigel 288 to your PC.
Click on File on the Bluetooth Downloader menu and select Send File. This will open a
window allowing you to select the text file containing your Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comments configuration data. Select the require file and click on Open.
The Bluetooth Downloader will now transfer the configuration file to the Rigel 288.
Click on File on the Bluetooth Downloader menu and select Send File. This will open a
window allowing you to select the text file containing your Trace Variables, User
Profiles and Comments configuration data. Select the require file and click on Open.
The Bluetooth Downloader will now transfer the configuration file to the Rigel 288.
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
If the transfer is not successful, check that the format of the configuration file exactly
matches that specified.
If the transfer is not successful, check that the format of the configuration file exactly
matches that specified.
Note: The Config file must be ASCII text and the last entry must be the [END]
statement.
Note: The Config file must be ASCII text and the last entry must be the [END]
statement.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
87
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
87
7.4.
Clone Data
7.4.
Clone Data
This feature can be used to transfer, store and copy the current Test Sequences and
Test Codes to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel 288 units with
identical Test Sequences and Test Codes.
This feature can be used to transfer, store and copy the current Test Sequences and
Test Codes to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel 288 units with
identical Test Sequences and Test Codes.
The process is identical to transferring the Configuration Data as mentioned above.
Due to the amount of data transferred, the Clone download will take longer than the
Configuration Data transfer.
The process is identical to transferring the Configuration Data as mentioned above.
Due to the amount of data transferred, the Clone download will take longer than the
Configuration Data transfer.
7.5.
Load TnT Logo
7.5.
Load TnT Logo
A bitmap logo can be transferred to the Rigel 288 for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’
Tag print system.
A bitmap logo can be transferred to the Rigel 288 for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’
Tag print system.
The logo must be in .BMP format with a maximum size of 320 pixels by 240 pixels.
The logo must be in .BMP format with a maximum size of 320 pixels by 240 pixels.
Press
button (F4), select Data Transfer using the up/down keys, select load T ‘n’
T logo and press the
Press
button (F4), select Data Transfer using the up/down keys, select load T ‘n’
T logo and press the
button (F4).
button (F4).
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in Bluetooth Favourites.
When a connection has been established the display will be as shown below.
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in Bluetooth Favourites.
When a connection has been established the display will be as shown below.
The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive data. The amount of data received is shown
numerically on the top left of the display (0 in the screen shot above).
The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive data. The amount of data received is shown
numerically on the top left of the display (0 in the screen shot above).
When using the BlueTooth Downloader application, select Send File from the File
menu in the task bar. This will open a window allowing you to select the Bitmap file.
Select the required Bitmap and click on Open. The Bluetooth Downloader will now
transfer the file to the Rigel 288.
When using the BlueTooth Downloader application, select Send File from the File
menu in the task bar. This will open a window allowing you to select the Bitmap file.
Select the required Bitmap and click on Open. The Bluetooth Downloader will now
transfer the file to the Rigel 288.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
7.4.
88
Clone Data
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
7.4.
88
Clone Data
This feature can be used to transfer, store and copy the current Test Sequences and
Test Codes to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel 288 units with
identical Test Sequences and Test Codes.
This feature can be used to transfer, store and copy the current Test Sequences and
Test Codes to/from a PC. It can be used to configure a number of Rigel 288 units with
identical Test Sequences and Test Codes.
The process is identical to transferring the Configuration Data as mentioned above.
Due to the amount of data transferred, the Clone download will take longer than the
Configuration Data transfer.
The process is identical to transferring the Configuration Data as mentioned above.
Due to the amount of data transferred, the Clone download will take longer than the
Configuration Data transfer.
7.5.
Load TnT Logo
7.5.
Load TnT Logo
A bitmap logo can be transferred to the Rigel 288 for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’
Tag print system.
A bitmap logo can be transferred to the Rigel 288 for use with the Seaward Test ‘n’
Tag print system.
The logo must be in .BMP format with a maximum size of 320 pixels by 240 pixels.
The logo must be in .BMP format with a maximum size of 320 pixels by 240 pixels.
Press
button (F4), select Data Transfer using the up/down keys, select load T ‘n’
T logo and press the
button (F4).
Press
button (F4), select Data Transfer using the up/down keys, select load T ‘n’
T logo and press the
button (F4).
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in Bluetooth Favourites.
When a connection has been established the display will be as shown below.
The Rigel 288 will now attempt to connect to the PC, setup in Bluetooth Favourites.
When a connection has been established the display will be as shown below.
The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive data. The amount of data received is shown
numerically on the top left of the display (0 in the screen shot above).
The Rigel 288 is now ready to receive data. The amount of data received is shown
numerically on the top left of the display (0 in the screen shot above).
When using the BlueTooth Downloader application, select Send File from the File
menu in the task bar. This will open a window allowing you to select the Bitmap file.
Select the required Bitmap and click on Open. The Bluetooth Downloader will now
transfer the file to the Rigel 288.
When using the BlueTooth Downloader application, select Send File from the File
menu in the task bar. This will open a window allowing you to select the Bitmap file.
Select the required Bitmap and click on Open. The Bluetooth Downloader will now
transfer the file to the Rigel 288.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
88
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
88
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
button (F4) to save the logo. The logo is now available for
Press the
printing using the Seaward Test ’nTag printer.
button (F4) to save the logo. The logo is now available for
Press the
printing using the Seaward Test ’nTag printer.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (data transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (data transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal.
8. About
8. About
This screen provides details on the Rigel 288’s;
This screen provides details on the Rigel 288’s;
•
•
•
•
•
•
Firmware version
Serial Number
Blue Tooth ID
Ensure you have this information available when contacting Rigel Medical for Technical
Support or Service. See chapter 9 for more information on Service and Calibration
Procedures.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
89
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
Firmware version
Serial Number
Blue Tooth ID
Ensure you have this information available when contacting Rigel Medical for Technical
Support or Service. See chapter 9 for more information on Service and Calibration
Procedures.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
89
When the transfer is complete the Rigel 288 screen will display a message as shown
below.
button (F4) to save the logo. The logo is now available for
Press the
printing using the Seaward Test ’nTag printer.
button (F4) to save the logo. The logo is now available for
Press the
printing using the Seaward Test ’nTag printer.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (data transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal.
Note: The file transfer can be made using any suitable PC application such as
the Seaward Bluetooth Downloader (data transfer.exe) or Hyperterminal.
8. About
8. About
This screen provides details on the Rigel 288’s;
This screen provides details on the Rigel 288’s;
•
•
•
•
•
•
Firmware version
Serial Number
Blue Tooth ID
Ensure you have this information available when contacting Rigel Medical for Technical
Support or Service. See chapter 9 for more information on Service and Calibration
Procedures.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
89
Firmware version
Serial Number
Blue Tooth ID
Ensure you have this information available when contacting Rigel Medical for Technical
Support or Service. See chapter 9 for more information on Service and Calibration
Procedures.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
89
9. Maintaining the Rigel 288
9.1.
9. Maintaining the Rigel 288
Cleaning the Analyser
9.1.
Cleaning the Analyser
The Rigel 288 case can be cleaned with a damp cloth with, if necessary, a small
amount of mild detergent. Prevent excessive moisture around the socket panel or in
the lead storage area.
The Rigel 288 case can be cleaned with a damp cloth with, if necessary, a small
amount of mild detergent. Prevent excessive moisture around the socket panel or in
the lead storage area.
Do not allow liquid inside the Rigel 288 or near the sockets. Do not use abrasives,
solvents or alcohol.
Do not allow liquid inside the Rigel 288 or near the sockets. Do not use abrasives,
solvents or alcohol.
If any liquid is spilt into the Rigel 288 case, the Analyser should be returned for repair,
stating the cause of the defect.
If any liquid is spilt into the Rigel 288 case, the Analyser should be returned for repair,
stating the cause of the defect.
9.2.
User Maintenance
9.2.
User Maintenance
The Rigel 288 is a rugged quality instrument. However, care should always be taken
when using, transporting and storing this type of equipment. Failure to treat the
product with care will reduce both the life of the instrument and its reliability.
If the Rigel 288 is subject to condensation, allow the Analyser to completely dry before
use.
The Rigel 288 is a rugged quality instrument. However, care should always be taken
when using, transporting and storing this type of equipment. Failure to treat the
product with care will reduce both the life of the instrument and its reliability.
If the Rigel 288 is subject to condensation, allow the Analyser to completely dry before
use.
• Always check the Rigel 288 and all test leads for signs of damage and wear before
use.
• Always check the Rigel 288 and all test leads for signs of damage and wear before
use.
• Do not open the Rigel 288 under any circumstances.
• Do not open the Rigel 288 under any circumstances.
• Keep the instrument clean and dry.
• Keep the instrument clean and dry.
• Avoid testing in conditions of high electrostatic or electromagnetic fields.
• Avoid testing in conditions of high electrostatic or electromagnetic fields.
• Maintenance should only be performed by authorised personnel.
• Maintenance should only be performed by authorised personnel.
• There are no user replaceable parts in the Rigel 288.
• There are no user replaceable parts in the Rigel 288.
• The unit should be regularly calibrated (at least annually).
• The unit should be regularly calibrated (at least annually).
9.3.
Return Instructions.
9.3.
For repair or calibration return the instrument to:-
For repair or calibration return the instrument to:-
Rigel Medical
Service Dept.,
p.a. Seaward Electronic Limited.
Bracken Hill
South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, Co. Durham
SR8 2SW, England
Rigel Medical
Service Dept.,
p.a. Seaward Electronic Limited.
Bracken Hill
South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, Co. Durham
SR8 2SW, England
Tel : +44 (0)191 5878739
Fax: +44 (0)191 586 0227
Tel : +44 (0)191 5878739
Fax: +44 (0)191 586 0227
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
90
9. Maintaining the Rigel 288
9.1.
Return Instructions.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
90
9. Maintaining the Rigel 288
Cleaning the Analyser
9.1.
Cleaning the Analyser
The Rigel 288 case can be cleaned with a damp cloth with, if necessary, a small
amount of mild detergent. Prevent excessive moisture around the socket panel or in
the lead storage area.
The Rigel 288 case can be cleaned with a damp cloth with, if necessary, a small
amount of mild detergent. Prevent excessive moisture around the socket panel or in
the lead storage area.
Do not allow liquid inside the Rigel 288 or near the sockets. Do not use abrasives,
solvents or alcohol.
Do not allow liquid inside the Rigel 288 or near the sockets. Do not use abrasives,
solvents or alcohol.
If any liquid is spilt into the Rigel 288 case, the Analyser should be returned for repair,
stating the cause of the defect.
If any liquid is spilt into the Rigel 288 case, the Analyser should be returned for repair,
stating the cause of the defect.
9.2.
User Maintenance
9.2.
User Maintenance
The Rigel 288 is a rugged quality instrument. However, care should always be taken
when using, transporting and storing this type of equipment. Failure to treat the
product with care will reduce both the life of the instrument and its reliability.
If the Rigel 288 is subject to condensation, allow the Analyser to completely dry before
use.
The Rigel 288 is a rugged quality instrument. However, care should always be taken
when using, transporting and storing this type of equipment. Failure to treat the
product with care will reduce both the life of the instrument and its reliability.
If the Rigel 288 is subject to condensation, allow the Analyser to completely dry before
use.
• Always check the Rigel 288 and all test leads for signs of damage and wear before
use.
• Always check the Rigel 288 and all test leads for signs of damage and wear before
use.
• Do not open the Rigel 288 under any circumstances.
• Do not open the Rigel 288 under any circumstances.
• Keep the instrument clean and dry.
• Keep the instrument clean and dry.
• Avoid testing in conditions of high electrostatic or electromagnetic fields.
• Avoid testing in conditions of high electrostatic or electromagnetic fields.
• Maintenance should only be performed by authorised personnel.
• Maintenance should only be performed by authorised personnel.
• There are no user replaceable parts in the Rigel 288.
• There are no user replaceable parts in the Rigel 288.
• The unit should be regularly calibrated (at least annually).
• The unit should be regularly calibrated (at least annually).
9.3.
Return Instructions.
9.3.
For repair or calibration return the instrument to:-
Return Instructions.
For repair or calibration return the instrument to:-
Rigel Medical
Service Dept.,
p.a. Seaward Electronic Limited.
Bracken Hill
South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, Co. Durham
SR8 2SW, England
Rigel Medical
Service Dept.,
p.a. Seaward Electronic Limited.
Bracken Hill
South West Industrial Estate
Peterlee, Co. Durham
SR8 2SW, England
Tel : +44 (0)191 5878739
Fax: +44 (0)191 586 0227
Tel : +44 (0)191 5878739
Fax: +44 (0)191 586 0227
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
90
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
90
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
www.seaward.co.uk
www.seaward.co.uk
www.rigelmedical.com
www.rigelmedical.com
Prior to returning your unit for service, please contact our service department to obtain
a Returns Number.
Prior to returning your unit for service, please contact our service department to obtain
a Returns Number.
By obtaining a Returns Number, your service request can be booked in advance thus
reducing the down time of your equipment.
By obtaining a Returns Number, your service request can be booked in advance thus
reducing the down time of your equipment.
When asking for a Returns Number, please quote:
When asking for a Returns Number, please quote:
•
Instruments name and model
•
Instruments name and model
•
Serial number (see section 8)
•
Serial number (see section 8)
•
Firmware version (see section 8)
•
Firmware version (see section 8)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
91
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
www.seaward.co.uk
www.seaward.co.uk
www.rigelmedical.com
www.rigelmedical.com
91
Prior to returning your unit for service, please contact our service department to obtain
a Returns Number.
Prior to returning your unit for service, please contact our service department to obtain
a Returns Number.
By obtaining a Returns Number, your service request can be booked in advance thus
reducing the down time of your equipment.
By obtaining a Returns Number, your service request can be booked in advance thus
reducing the down time of your equipment.
When asking for a Returns Number, please quote:
When asking for a Returns Number, please quote:
•
Instruments name and model
•
Instruments name and model
•
Serial number (see section 8)
•
Serial number (see section 8)
•
Firmware version (see section 8)
•
Firmware version (see section 8)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
91
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
91
10
Technical Specifications
10
Earth Continuity
Technical Specifications
Earth Continuity
Method 2 wire technique
using 'zero' lead function.
Test Current
>+200mA -200mA DC into 2 ohms
Max Test Voltage
4-24V rms o/c (6V for IEC 60601 tests)
Method 2 wire technique
using 'zero' lead function.
Test Current
>+200mA -200mA DC into 2 ohms
Max Test Voltage
4-24V rms o/c (6V for IEC 60601 tests)
Measuring Range (low range)
0.001 – 0.999 ohms @ 0.001 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (low range)
0.001 – 0.999 ohms @ 0.001 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (mid range)
1.00 – 9.99 ohms /@ 0.01 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (mid range)
1.00 – 9.99 ohms /@ 0.01 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (high range)
10.0 – 19.9 ohms @ 0.1 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (high range)
10.0 – 19.9 ohms @ 0.1 ohms resolution
Accuracy
± 3% of reading + 10 m ohms
Insulation Resistance
Accuracy
± 3% of reading + 10 m ohms
Insulation Resistance
Measurement
EUT to Earth / Ground
EUT to AP
AP to Ground
Voltage
250V DC & 500 V DC @1mA.
Range (low range)
0.01Mohms - 20 Mohms
Accuracy (low range)
± 5% of reading +2 counts
Measurement
EUT to Earth / Ground
EUT to AP
AP to Ground
Voltage
250V DC & 500 V DC @1mA.
Range (low range)
0.01Mohms - 20 Mohms
Accuracy (low range)
± 5% of reading +2 counts
Range (high range) @ 500VDC
20Mohms – 100Mohms
Range (high range) @ 500VDC
20Mohms – 100Mohms
Range (high range) @ 250VDC
20Mohms – 50Mohms
Range (high range) @ 250VDC
20Mohms – 50Mohms
Accuracy (high range)
±10% +2 counts
Resolution
0.01Mohms
Direct Leakage Measurement
±10% +2 counts
Resolution
0.01Mohms
Direct Leakage Measurement
Measuring Range
4μA to 9999μA
Accuracy
± 5% or reading +2 counts
Mains on A.P. voltage
F-type only @ 110% of mains
Measuring Device
Measurement Type
Accuracy (high range)
As per IEC 60601-1 requirements
Separate AC & DC for Patient (-Auxiliary) Leakage to IEC
Measuring Range
4μA to 9999μA
Accuracy
± 5% or reading +2 counts
Mains on A.P. voltage
F-type only @ 110% of mains
Measuring Device
Measurement Type
As per IEC 60601-1 requirements
Separate AC & DC for Patient (-Auxiliary) Leakage to IEC
60601, True RMS for all remaining Leakage tests
Differential Leakage Measurement
Measuring Range
±5% of reading + 5 counts
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
10
Differential Leakage Measurement
75μA to 9999μA
Accuracy
60601, True RMS for all remaining Leakage tests
Measuring Range
92
Technical Specifications
±5% of reading + 5 counts
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
10
Earth Continuity
75μA to 9999μA
Accuracy
92
Technical Specifications
Earth Continuity
Method 2 wire technique
using 'zero' lead function.
Test Current
>+200mA -200mA DC into 2 ohms
Max Test Voltage
4-24V rms o/c (6V for IEC 60601 tests)
Method 2 wire technique
using 'zero' lead function.
Test Current
>+200mA -200mA DC into 2 ohms
Max Test Voltage
4-24V rms o/c (6V for IEC 60601 tests)
Measuring Range (low range)
0.001 – 0.999 ohms @ 0.001 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (low range)
0.001 – 0.999 ohms @ 0.001 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (mid range)
1.00 – 9.99 ohms /@ 0.01 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (mid range)
1.00 – 9.99 ohms /@ 0.01 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (high range)
10.0 – 19.9 ohms @ 0.1 ohms resolution
Measuring Range (high range)
10.0 – 19.9 ohms @ 0.1 ohms resolution
Accuracy
± 3% of reading + 10 m ohms
Insulation Resistance
Accuracy
± 3% of reading + 10 m ohms
Insulation Resistance
Measurement
EUT to Earth / Ground
EUT to AP
AP to Ground
Voltage
250V DC & 500 V DC @1mA.
Range (low range)
0.01Mohms - 20 Mohms
Accuracy (low range)
± 5% of reading +2 counts
Measurement
EUT to Earth / Ground
EUT to AP
AP to Ground
Voltage
250V DC & 500 V DC @1mA.
Range (low range)
0.01Mohms - 20 Mohms
Accuracy (low range)
± 5% of reading +2 counts
Range (high range) @ 500VDC
20Mohms – 100Mohms
Range (high range) @ 500VDC
20Mohms – 100Mohms
Range (high range) @ 250VDC
20Mohms – 50Mohms
Range (high range) @ 250VDC
20Mohms – 50Mohms
Accuracy (high range)
±10% +2 counts
Resolution
0.01Mohms
Direct Leakage Measurement
±10% +2 counts
Resolution
0.01Mohms
Direct Leakage Measurement
Measuring Range
4μA to 9999μA
Accuracy
± 5% or reading +2 counts
Mains on A.P. voltage
F-type only @ 110% of mains
Measuring Device
Measurement Type
Accuracy (high range)
As per IEC 60601-1 requirements
Separate AC & DC for Patient (-Auxiliary) Leakage to IEC
Measuring Range
4μA to 9999μA
Accuracy
± 5% or reading +2 counts
Mains on A.P. voltage
F-type only @ 110% of mains
Measuring Device
Measurement Type
As per IEC 60601-1 requirements
Separate AC & DC for Patient (-Auxiliary) Leakage to IEC
60601, True RMS for all remaining Leakage tests
Differential Leakage Measurement
Measuring Range
Accuracy
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
60601, True RMS for all remaining Leakage tests
Differential Leakage Measurement
75μA to 9999μA
±5% of reading + 5 counts
92
Measuring Range
Accuracy
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
75μA to 9999μA
±5% of reading + 5 counts
92
Measurement / display resolution
1μA
Measurement Type
Measuring Device
True RMS
frequency response characteristics to IEC 60601-1.
Alternative Leakage Measurements:
Measurement / display resolution
1μA
Measurement Type
Measuring Device
True RMS
frequency response characteristics to IEC 60601-1.
Alternative Leakage Measurements:
Test Voltage
250V at mains frequency
Test Voltage
250V at mains frequency
Test Current
3.5 mA current limited
Test Current
3.5 mA current limited
Measurement Range
4μA to 9999μA
Measurement Resolution
1μA
Measurement Accuracy
±5% of reading + 2 counts
Measurement Type
True RMS
Measuring Device
As per IEC 60601-1
Power Measurement
Measurement Range
4μA to 9999μA
Measurement Resolution
1μA
Measurement Accuracy
±5% of reading + 2 counts
Measurement Type
True RMS
Measuring Device
As per IEC 60601-1
Power Measurement
Method
VA rating.
Range
0.1KVA – 4KVA
Accuracy
±10% + 2 counts
Mains Outlet Test
Method
VA rating.
Range
0.1KVA – 4KVA
Accuracy
±10% + 2 counts
Mains Outlet Test
Input voltage range
0-300V AC
max current
16A
Input voltage range
0-300V AC
max current
16A
Measures
L – E, N – E
Measures
L – E, N – E
Accuracy
± 5% of reading + 2 counts
Accuracy
± 5% of reading + 2 counts
IEC Mains Lead Test
IEC Mains Lead Test
Test Duration
Test
2s
Continuity of all EB conductor, Insulation & Polarity
General
Test Duration
Test
2s
Continuity of all EB conductor, Insulation & Polarity
General
Mains power
230 VAC ±10%, 50Hz +/- 1Hz
Mains power
230 VAC ±10%, 50Hz +/- 1Hz
120 VAC ±10%, 60Hz +/- 1Hz (USA model)
120 VAC ±10%, 60Hz +/- 1Hz (USA model)
Battery
6 x 1.5V Alkaline AA
Battery
6 x 1.5V Alkaline AA
Weight
1.6 kg including batteries
Weight
1.6 kg including batteries
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
93
Measurement / display resolution
1μA
Measurement Type
Measuring Device
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
True RMS
frequency response characteristics to IEC 60601-1.
Alternative Leakage Measurements:
93
Measurement / display resolution
1μA
Measurement Type
Measuring Device
True RMS
frequency response characteristics to IEC 60601-1.
Alternative Leakage Measurements:
Test Voltage
250V at mains frequency
Test Voltage
250V at mains frequency
Test Current
3.5 mA current limited
Test Current
3.5 mA current limited
Measurement Range
4μA to 9999μA
Measurement Resolution
1μA
Measurement Accuracy
±5% of reading + 2 counts
Measurement Type
True RMS
Measuring Device
As per IEC 60601-1
Power Measurement
Measurement Range
4μA to 9999μA
Measurement Resolution
1μA
Measurement Accuracy
±5% of reading + 2 counts
Measurement Type
True RMS
Measuring Device
As per IEC 60601-1
Power Measurement
Method
VA rating.
Range
0.1KVA – 4KVA
Accuracy
±10% + 2 counts
Mains Outlet Test
Method
VA rating.
Range
0.1KVA – 4KVA
Accuracy
±10% + 2 counts
Mains Outlet Test
Input voltage range
0-300V AC
max current
16A
Input voltage range
0-300V AC
max current
16A
Measures
L – E, N – E
Measures
L – E, N – E
Accuracy
± 5% of reading + 2 counts
Accuracy
± 5% of reading + 2 counts
IEC Mains Lead Test
IEC Mains Lead Test
Test Duration
Test
2s
Continuity of all EB conductor, Insulation & Polarity
General
Mains power
Test Duration
Test
2s
Continuity of all EB conductor, Insulation & Polarity
General
230 VAC ±10%, 50Hz +/- 1Hz
Mains power
120 VAC ±10%, 60Hz +/- 1Hz (USA model)
230 VAC ±10%, 50Hz +/- 1Hz
120 VAC ±10%, 60Hz +/- 1Hz (USA model)
Battery
6 x 1.5V Alkaline AA
Battery
6 x 1.5V Alkaline AA
Weight
1.6 kg including batteries
Weight
1.6 kg including batteries
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
93
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
93
Size (L x W x D)
270 x 110 x 75 mm / 10.5 x 4 x 3”
Size (L x W x D)
270 x 110 x 75 mm / 10.5 x 4 x 3”
Operating conditions
0˚C - 40˚C, 0-90% RH - NC
Operating conditions
0˚C - 40˚C, 0-90% RH - NC
Storage environment
-15˚C - +60˚C
Storage environment
-15˚C - +60˚C
Environmental Protection
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Size (L x W x D)
IP 40
94
Environmental Protection
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
270 x 110 x 75 mm / 10.5 x 4 x 3”
Size (L x W x D)
IP 40
94
270 x 110 x 75 mm / 10.5 x 4 x 3”
Operating conditions
0˚C - 40˚C, 0-90% RH - NC
Operating conditions
0˚C - 40˚C, 0-90% RH - NC
Storage environment
-15˚C - +60˚C
Storage environment
-15˚C - +60˚C
Environmental Protection
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
IP 40
94
Environmental Protection
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
IP 40
94
Appendix A
Definition of IEC 60601 tests
Appendix A
Definition of IEC 60601 tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
Earth Leakage Test
Earth Leakage Test
Mains voltage applied to EUT
Mains voltage applied to EUT
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
medical device into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important
as it demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
medical device into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important
as it demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done under normal and reverse
operation and single fault condition (neutral open circuit). The earth leakage test is valid
for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF applied parts. Appendix A shows the
pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done under normal and reverse
operation and single fault condition (neutral open circuit). The earth leakage test is valid
for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF applied parts. Appendix A shows the
pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
Note - SFC 'Open Earth’ cannot be performed as this would result in zero leakage
measurements under all circumstances.
Note - SFC 'Open Earth’ cannot be performed as this would result in zero leakage
measurements under all circumstances.
Diagram A shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram A shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix A
95
Definition of IEC 60601 tests
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix A
95
Definition of IEC 60601 tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
Earth Leakage Test
Earth Leakage Test
Mains voltage applied to EUT
Mains voltage applied to EUT
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
medical device into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important
as it demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The Earth Leakage Test shows the current flowing through or via the insulation of the
medical device into the protective earth conductor. The earth leakage test is important
as it demonstrates the total leakage from the EUT.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts.
The earth leakage tests are valid for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF
applied parts.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done under normal and reverse
operation and single fault condition (neutral open circuit). The earth leakage test is valid
for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF applied parts. Appendix A shows the
pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done under normal and reverse
operation and single fault condition (neutral open circuit). The earth leakage test is valid
for Class I equipment with Types B, BF and CF applied parts. Appendix A shows the
pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
Note - SFC 'Open Earth’ cannot be performed as this would result in zero leakage
measurements under all circumstances.
Note - SFC 'Open Earth’ cannot be performed as this would result in zero leakage
measurements under all circumstances.
Diagram A shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram A shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
95
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
95
Diagram A - Test Circuit for Earth Leakage
Diagram A - Test Circuit for Earth Leakage
Earth Leakage, normal conditions
Earth Leakage, normal conditions
This test measures the earth leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed and S5 normal and then S5
reversed.
This test measures the earth leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed and S5 normal and then S5
reversed.
Earth Leakage, single fault, supply open
Earth Leakage, single fault, supply open
This test measures the earth leakage current with a single fault condition (supply open).
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open and S5 normal
and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the earth leakage current with a single fault condition (supply open).
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open and S5 normal
and then S5 reversed.
Enclosure Leakage Test
Enclosure Leakage Test
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
In general, Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person would
come in contact with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or
care) of the medical device. IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done
under normal and reverse operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions
Open Neutral circuit and Open Earth.
In general, Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person would
come in contact with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or
care) of the medical device. IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done
under normal and reverse operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions
Open Neutral circuit and Open Earth.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B,
BF and CF Applied Parts. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B,
BF and CF Applied Parts. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
For enclosure leakage tests the earth bond probe is used to make contact with all
conductive non-protectively earthed parts of the equipment.
For enclosure leakage tests the earth bond probe is used to make contact with all
conductive non-protectively earthed parts of the equipment.
When testing Class II devices, or fully insulated enclosures, the enclosure can be
encapsulated by using aluminium foil of approximately 200 cm2. The enclosure
leakage is measured by connecting the aluminium foil to the leakage tester.
When testing Class II devices, or fully insulated enclosures, the enclosure can be
encapsulated by using aluminium foil of approximately 200 cm2. The enclosure
leakage is measured by connecting the aluminium foil to the leakage tester.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
96
Diagram A - Test Circuit for Earth Leakage
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
96
Diagram A - Test Circuit for Earth Leakage
Earth Leakage, normal conditions
Earth Leakage, normal conditions
This test measures the earth leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed and S5 normal and then S5
reversed.
This test measures the earth leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed and S5 normal and then S5
reversed.
Earth Leakage, single fault, supply open
Earth Leakage, single fault, supply open
This test measures the earth leakage current with a single fault condition (supply open).
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open and S5 normal
and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the earth leakage current with a single fault condition (supply open).
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open and S5 normal
and then S5 reversed.
Enclosure Leakage Test
Enclosure Leakage Test
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
In general, Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person would
come in contact with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or
care) of the medical device. IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done
under normal and reverse operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions
Open Neutral circuit and Open Earth.
In general, Enclosure Leakage displays the current that would flow if a person would
come in contact with the housing (or any accessible part not intended for treatment or
care) of the medical device. IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements are done
under normal and reverse operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions
Open Neutral circuit and Open Earth.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B,
BF and CF Applied Parts. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
The Enclosure Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B,
BF and CF Applied Parts. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
For enclosure leakage tests the earth bond probe is used to make contact with all
conductive non-protectively earthed parts of the equipment.
For enclosure leakage tests the earth bond probe is used to make contact with all
conductive non-protectively earthed parts of the equipment.
When testing Class II devices, or fully insulated enclosures, the enclosure can be
encapsulated by using aluminium foil of approximately 200 cm2. The enclosure
leakage is measured by connecting the aluminium foil to the leakage tester.
When testing Class II devices, or fully insulated enclosures, the enclosure can be
encapsulated by using aluminium foil of approximately 200 cm2. The enclosure
leakage is measured by connecting the aluminium foil to the leakage tester.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
96
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
96
Diagram B shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram B - Test Circuit For Enclosure Leakage
Diagram B shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram B - Test Circuit For Enclosure Leakage
Enclosure Leakage, normal condition
Enclosure Leakage, normal condition
This test measures the enclosure leakage current under normal conditions. The current
is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed and S5 normal and
reversed.
This test measures the enclosure leakage current under normal conditions. The current
is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed and S5 normal and
reversed.
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, supply open
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, supply open
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, earth open
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, earth open
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed.
Patient Leakage
Patient Leakage
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B, BF
and CF applied.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B, BF
and CF applied.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
97
Diagram B shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram B - Test Circuit For Enclosure Leakage
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
97
Diagram B shows a schematic interpretation of the earth leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram B - Test Circuit For Enclosure Leakage
Enclosure Leakage, normal condition
Enclosure Leakage, normal condition
This test measures the enclosure leakage current under normal conditions. The current
is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed and S5 normal and
reversed.
This test measures the enclosure leakage current under normal conditions. The current
is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed and S5 normal and
reversed.
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, supply open
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, supply open
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, earth open
Enclosure Leakage, single fault, earth open
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the enclosure leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 in normal and then S5 reversed.
Patient Leakage
Patient Leakage
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Current is the current flowing from the Applied Part via the patient
to earth or flowing from the patient via an Applied Part to earth, which originates from
an unintended voltage appearing on an external source.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B, BF
and CF applied.
The Patient Leakage Test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types B, BF
and CF applied.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
97
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
97
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be done under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be done under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
For type CF equipment the patient leakage current is measured from each applied part
separately however, for type B and BF equipment, the patient leakage current is
measured with all applied parts connected together.
For type CF equipment the patient leakage current is measured from each applied part
separately however, for type B and BF equipment, the patient leakage current is
measured with all applied parts connected together.
Diagram C shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram C shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram C - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current
Diagram C - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current
Patient Leakage, normal condition
Patient Leakage, normal condition
This test measures the patient leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
Patient Leakage, single fault, supply open
Patient Leakage, single fault, supply open
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Patient Leakage, single fault, earth open
Patient Leakage, single fault, earth open
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Note – this test is not performed on class II equipment.
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Note – this test is not performed on class II equipment.
Patient Leakage – F-Type
Patient Leakage – F-Type
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Warning
98
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
98
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be done under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be done under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1 requirements.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
For type CF equipment the patient leakage current is measured from each applied part
separately however, for type B and BF equipment, the patient leakage current is
measured with all applied parts connected together.
For type CF equipment the patient leakage current is measured from each applied part
separately however, for type B and BF equipment, the patient leakage current is
measured with all applied parts connected together.
Diagram C shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram C shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram C - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current
Diagram C - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current
Patient Leakage, normal condition
Patient Leakage, normal condition
This test measures the patient leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient leakage current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
Patient Leakage, single fault, supply open
Patient Leakage, single fault, supply open
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Patient Leakage, single fault, earth open
Patient Leakage, single fault, earth open
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Note – this test is not performed on class II equipment.
This test measures the patient leakage current with a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8
open and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Note – this test is not performed on class II equipment.
Patient Leakage – F-Type
Patient Leakage – F-Type
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Warning
98
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
98
Warning !!!
This test involves applying a current limited mains
Potential(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Part
connections. Due to the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in
excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the
user. Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a
limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
This test involves applying a current limited mains
Potential(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Part
connections. Due to the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in
excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the
user. Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a
limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with BF and / or CF
Applied Part only and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source voltage
normal or reverse conditions. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with BF and / or CF
Applied Part only and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source voltage
normal or reverse conditions. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
This test involves applying a current limited mains potential (110% of mains input
voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to the requirements for IEC 60601-1
this test current can be in excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is
hazardous to the user.
This test involves applying a current limited mains potential (110% of mains input
voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to the requirements for IEC 60601-1
this test current can be in excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is
hazardous to the user.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a limiting
resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a limiting
resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
IEC60601-1 specifies that leakage current for type CF Applied Parts is measured from
each of the patient connection / applied parts separately. For type BF equipment the
leakage current is measured with all parts of the same type applied parts connected
together, shown dotted below.
IEC60601-1 specifies that leakage current for type CF Applied Parts is measured from
each of the patient connection / applied parts separately. For type BF equipment the
leakage current is measured with all parts of the same type applied parts connected
together, shown dotted below.
Diagram D shows a schematic interpretation of the F-Type Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram D shows a schematic interpretation of the F-Type Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram D - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current, Mains On Applied Part
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Warning !!!
Diagram D - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current, Mains On Applied Part
99
Warning !!!
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
99
This test involves applying a current limited mains
Potential(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Part
connections. Due to the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in
excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the
user. Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a
limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
This test involves applying a current limited mains
Potential(110% of mains input voltage) to the Applied Part
connections. Due to the requirements for IEC60601 this test current can be in
excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is hazardous to the
user. Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a
limiting resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The Patient Leakage F-Type Test (also known as mains on Applied Parts test) displays
the current that would flow if a mains potential was applied to the Applied Part which
was attached to a patient (i.e. a single fault condition).
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with BF and / or CF
Applied Part only and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source voltage
normal or reverse conditions. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
The F-type Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with BF and / or CF
Applied Part only and are measured under mains normal or reverse and source voltage
normal or reverse conditions. Appendix A shows the pass/fail limits as per IEC 60601-1
requirements.
This test involves applying a current limited mains potential (110% of mains input
voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to the requirements for IEC 60601-1
this test current can be in excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is
hazardous to the user.
This test involves applying a current limited mains potential (110% of mains input
voltage) to the Applied Parts connections. Due to the requirements for IEC 60601-1
this test current can be in excess of 5mA under short circuit conditions and as such is
hazardous to the user.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a limiting
resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
Caution should be taken when conducting this test. Current limiting is via a limiting
resistor in series with the measurement circuit.
IEC60601-1 specifies that leakage current for type CF Applied Parts is measured from
each of the patient connection / applied parts separately. For type BF equipment the
leakage current is measured with all parts of the same type applied parts connected
together, shown dotted below.
IEC60601-1 specifies that leakage current for type CF Applied Parts is measured from
each of the patient connection / applied parts separately. For type BF equipment the
leakage current is measured with all parts of the same type applied parts connected
together, shown dotted below.
Diagram D shows a schematic interpretation of the F-Type Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram D shows a schematic interpretation of the F-Type Leakage measurement
including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram D - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current, Mains On Applied Part
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Warning !!!
Diagram D - Test Circuit For Patient Leakage Current, Mains On Applied Part
99
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
99
IEC60601-for type BF equipment the leakage current is measured with all parts of the
applied part connected together, shown dotted above. For type CF equipment the
leakage current is measured from each of the applied parts separately
IEC60601-for type BF equipment the leakage current is measured with all parts of the
applied part connected together, shown dotted above. For type CF equipment the
leakage current is measured from each of the applied parts separately
Note – for this test ‘body model’ selection will be IEC60601.
Note – for this test ‘body model’ selection will be IEC60601.
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed. S5 and
S9 are switched between normal and reversed.
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed. S5 and
S9 are switched between normal and reversed.
Patient Auxiliary Current
Patient Auxiliary Current
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together. This test should be repeated until all combinations have been tested. This is
also referred to as Applied Part to All.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together. This test should be repeated until all combinations have been tested. This is
also referred to as Applied Part to All.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be carried out under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be carried out under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Diagram E shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Auxiliary Leakage
measurement including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram E shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Auxiliary Leakage
measurement including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram E - Test Circuit For Patient Auxilary Current
Diagram E - Test Circuit For Patient Auxilary Current
For these tests, current is measured between a single part of the applied part and all
other applied parts connected together. This test should be repeated until all
combinations have been tested.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
100
For these tests, current is measured between a single part of the applied part and all
other applied parts connected together. This test should be repeated until all
combinations have been tested.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
100
IEC60601-for type BF equipment the leakage current is measured with all parts of the
applied part connected together, shown dotted above. For type CF equipment the
leakage current is measured from each of the applied parts separately
IEC60601-for type BF equipment the leakage current is measured with all parts of the
applied part connected together, shown dotted above. For type CF equipment the
leakage current is measured from each of the applied parts separately
Note – for this test ‘body model’ selection will be IEC60601.
Note – for this test ‘body model’ selection will be IEC60601.
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed. S5 and
S9 are switched between normal and reversed.
The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed. S5 and
S9 are switched between normal and reversed.
Patient Auxiliary Current
Patient Auxiliary Current
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
Warning
Mains voltage applied to EUT.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together. This test should be repeated until all combinations have been tested. This is
also referred to as Applied Part to All.
The Patient Auxiliary Current displays the leakage current that would flow between
Applied Parts under normal and fault conditions. For these tests, current is measured
between a single part of the applied part and all other applied parts connected
together. This test should be repeated until all combinations have been tested. This is
also referred to as Applied Part to All.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied.
The Patient Auxiliary Leakage test is valid for both Class 1 and II equipment with Types
B, BF and CF applied.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be carried out under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth.
IEC 60601-1 specifies that the measurements be carried out under normal and reverse
operation of the mains supply and single fault conditions Open Neutral circuit and
Open Earth.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Note For Class II equipment, the Single Fault Earth Open tests are not required.
Diagram E shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Auxiliary Leakage
measurement including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram E shows a schematic interpretation of the Patient Auxiliary Leakage
measurement including the relays operating the single fault conditions.
Diagram E - Test Circuit For Patient Auxilary Current
Diagram E - Test Circuit For Patient Auxilary Current
For these tests, current is measured between a single part of the applied part and all
other applied parts connected together. This test should be repeated until all
combinations have been tested.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
100
For these tests, current is measured between a single part of the applied part and all
other applied parts connected together. This test should be repeated until all
combinations have been tested.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
100
Patient Auxiliary, normal condition
Patient Auxiliary, normal condition
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, supply open
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, supply open
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, earth open
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, earth open
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8 open
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8 open
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
101
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
101
Patient Auxiliary, normal condition
Patient Auxiliary, normal condition
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under normal conditions. The current is
measured through the Measuring Device with S1 and S8 closed, S5 normal and then
S5 reversed.
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, supply open
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, supply open
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (supply
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 open, S8 closed
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, earth open
Patient Auxiliary, single fault, earth open
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8 open
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
This test measures the patient auxiliary current under a single fault condition (earth
open). The current is measured through the Measuring Device with S1 closed, S8 open
and S5 normal and then S5 reversed.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
101
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
101
Appendix B
Pass / Fail Limits of IEC 60601-1
Appendix B
Earthbond test limit at 25A, 50Hz
Pass / Fail Limits of IEC 60601-1
Earthbond test limit at 25A, 50Hz
< 0.1 ȍ
Excluding power cord
< 0.2 ȍ
Including power cord
Type B
Applied Parts
< 0.1 ȍ
Excluding power cord
< 0.2 ȍ
Including power cord
Type BF
Applied Parts
Type CF
Applied Parts
Type B
Applied Parts
Type BF
Applied Parts
Type CF
Applied Parts
Leakage Current Type
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
Leakage Current Type
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
Earth Leakage (General)
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
Earth Leakage (General)
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
Enclosure Leakage
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
Enclosure Leakage
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
Patient Leakage (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Leakage (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Leakage (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Leakage (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Leakage (F-Type)
NA
NA
NA
5000μA
NA
50μA
Patient Leakage (Mains on SIP/SOP)
NA
5mA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Patient Leakage (F-Type)
NA
NA
NA
5000μA
NA
50μA
Patient Leakage (Mains on SIP/SOP)
NA
5mA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Patient Auxiliary Current (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Auxiliary Current (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Auxiliary Current (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Auxiliary Current (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix B
102
Pass / Fail Limits of IEC 60601-1
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix B
Earthbond test limit at 25A, 50Hz
102
Pass / Fail Limits of IEC 60601-1
Earthbond test limit at 25A, 50Hz
Excluding power cord
< 0.1 ȍ
Excluding power cord
< 0.1 ȍ
Including power cord
< 0.2 ȍ
Including power cord
< 0.2 ȍ
Type B
Applied Parts
Type BF
Applied Parts
Type CF
Applied Parts
Type B
Applied Parts
Type BF
Applied Parts
Type CF
Applied Parts
Leakage Current Type
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
Leakage Current Type
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
NC
SFC
Earth Leakage (General)
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
Earth Leakage (General)
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
Enclosure Leakage
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
Enclosure Leakage
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
Patient Leakage (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Leakage (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Leakage (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Leakage (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
NA
NA
NA
5000μA
NA
50μA
Patient Leakage (F-Type)
NA
NA
NA
5000μA
NA
50μA
Patient Leakage (F-Type)
Patient Leakage (Mains on SIP/SOP)
NA
5mA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
5mA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Patient Auxiliary Current (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Auxiliary Current (dc)
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Auxiliary Current (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
Patient Auxiliary Current (ac)
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
10μA
50μA
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
102
Patient Leakage (Mains on SIP/SOP)
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
102
Appendix C
Definition of IEC 62353 tests
Appendix C
Definition of IEC 62353 tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
Equipment Leakage
Equipment Leakage
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test is applicable to both Class I and II, B, BF and CF
equipment.
The Equipment Leakage Test is applicable to both Class I and II, B, BF and CF
equipment.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts (B / BF & CF) are connected together.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts (B / BF & CF) are connected together.
The test is conducted with the protective earth connection interrupted to ensure the
measurements are done under worst conditions. As such, any earth leakage current
will be measured as part of the enclosure (or touch) leakage.
The test is conducted with the protective earth connection interrupted to ensure the
measurements are done under worst conditions. As such, any earth leakage current
will be measured as part of the enclosure (or touch) leakage.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
The IEC 62353 specifies three different methods of measuring the Equipment Leakage
Current;
The IEC 62353 specifies three different methods of measuring the Equipment Leakage
Current;
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Method
Differential Method
Alternative Method
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix C
103
Definition of IEC 62353 tests
Direct Method
Differential Method
Alternative Method
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix C
103
Definition of IEC 62353 tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth Continuity Tests
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
Earth bond Testing, also referred to as Ground bond Testing, tests the integrity of the
low resistance connection between the earth conductor and any metal conductive
parts, which may become live in case of a fault on Class I medical devices. Although
many Class I medical devices are supplied with an earth reference point, most if not
all medical devices require multiple earth bond tests to validate the connections of
additional metal accessible parts on the enclosure.
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
The test current is applied between the earth pin of the mains supply plug and any
accessible metal part (including earth reference point) via a dedicated earth bond test
lead (clip/probe).
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
For fixed installations a Point-to-Point continuity measurement can be made by fitting
a second lead into the Aux Earth socket. The resistance is then measured between the
2 leads.
Equipment Leakage
Equipment Leakage
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the Applied
Parts, Enclosure and Mains Parts combined to real earth.
The Equipment Leakage Test is applicable to both Class I and II, B, BF and CF
equipment.
The Equipment Leakage Test is applicable to both Class I and II, B, BF and CF
equipment.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts (B / BF & CF) are connected together.
All Patient Connections and Applied Parts (B / BF & CF) are connected together.
The test is conducted with the protective earth connection interrupted to ensure the
measurements are done under worst conditions. As such, any earth leakage current
will be measured as part of the enclosure (or touch) leakage.
The test is conducted with the protective earth connection interrupted to ensure the
measurements are done under worst conditions. As such, any earth leakage current
will be measured as part of the enclosure (or touch) leakage.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
The IEC 62353 specifies three different methods of measuring the Equipment Leakage
Current;
The IEC 62353 specifies three different methods of measuring the Equipment Leakage
Current;
•
•
•
•
•
•
Direct Method
Differential Method
Alternative Method
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
103
Direct Method
Differential Method
Alternative Method
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
103
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth via the 1kȍ Measuring Device (Body Model).
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth via the 1kȍ Measuring Device (Body Model).
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
Differential method; The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC
60601 standard – see Appendix E) is positioned as part of a differential current
measurement between the Live and neutral conductor.
Differential method; The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC
60601 standard – see Appendix E) is positioned as part of a differential current
measurement between the Live and neutral conductor.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth to allow the Differential circuit to measure the total
leakage current.
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth to allow the Differential circuit to measure the total
leakage current.
Due to the Differential measuring method, potential secondary earth connections are
included in the total measurement and as such, the EUT doesn’t require to be
positioned isolated from earth.
Due to the Differential measuring method, potential secondary earth connections are
included in the total measurement and as such, the EUT doesn’t require to be
positioned isolated from earth.
Low leakage currents of less than 75μA are difficult to measure using the Differential
Leakage method. As such the Differential Leakage method is unsuitable for measuring
Low leakage currents of less than 75μA are difficult to measure using the Differential
Leakage method. As such the Differential Leakage method is unsuitable for measuring
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
104
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
104
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth via the 1kȍ Measuring Device (Body Model).
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth via the 1kȍ Measuring Device (Body Model).
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
Differential method; The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC
60601 standard – see Appendix E) is positioned as part of a differential current
measurement between the Live and neutral conductor.
Differential method; The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC
60601 standard – see Appendix E) is positioned as part of a differential current
measurement between the Live and neutral conductor.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains with the protective
earth to the EUT interrupted.
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth to allow the Differential circuit to measure the total
leakage current.
All Applied Parts and earthed (eg enclosure Class I) and non-earthed accessible
conductive parts or non-conductive accessible parts (enclosure Class II) are grouped
together and connected to earth to allow the Differential circuit to measure the total
leakage current.
Due to the Differential measuring method, potential secondary earth connections are
included in the total measurement and as such, the EUT doesn’t require to be
positioned isolated from earth.
Due to the Differential measuring method, potential secondary earth connections are
included in the total measurement and as such, the EUT doesn’t require to be
positioned isolated from earth.
Low leakage currents of less than 75μA are difficult to measure using the Differential
Leakage method. As such the Differential Leakage method is unsuitable for measuring
Low leakage currents of less than 75μA are difficult to measure using the Differential
Leakage method. As such the Differential Leakage method is unsuitable for measuring
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
104
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
104
conductive un-earthed parts and in those instances where leakages are expected to be
below 75μA.
conductive un-earthed parts and in those instances where leakages are expected to be
below 75μA.
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
mains parts and all accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive) including the
Applied Parts connected together.
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
mains parts and all accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive) including the
Applied Parts connected together.
The test is performed using current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The test is performed using current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned directly after the voltage source.
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned directly after the voltage source.
Measurements are with the protective earth to the EUT interrupted.
Measurements are with the protective earth to the EUT interrupted.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to be fully exposed to the potential leakage.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to be fully exposed to the potential leakage.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
Applied Part Leakage
Applied Part Leakage
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Floating type (BF & CF) Applied Parts
only either Class I or II.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Floating type (BF & CF) Applied Parts
only either Class I or II.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
105
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
105
conductive un-earthed parts and in those instances where leakages are expected to be
below 75μA.
conductive un-earthed parts and in those instances where leakages are expected to be
below 75μA.
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
mains parts and all accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive) including the
Applied Parts connected together.
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
mains parts and all accessible parts (conductive and non-conductive) including the
Applied Parts connected together.
The test is performed using current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The test is performed using current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned directly after the voltage source.
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned directly after the voltage source.
Measurements are with the protective earth to the EUT interrupted.
Measurements are with the protective earth to the EUT interrupted.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to be fully exposed to the potential leakage.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to be fully exposed to the potential leakage.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
Applied Part Leakage
Applied Part Leakage
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test measures the total leakage deriving from the combined
Patient Connections within an Applied Part to earth and any conductive or non
conductive parts on the enclosure (either connected or isolated from earth) under the
fault condition Mains on Applied Parts.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Floating type (BF & CF) Applied Parts
only either Class I or II.
The Applied Part Leakage Test is applicable to Floating type (BF & CF) Applied Parts
only either Class I or II.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
105
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
105
All Patient Connections of a single function within an Applied Part shall be connected
together (BF & CF) and measured one at the time.
All Patient Connections of a single function within an Applied Part shall be connected
together (BF & CF) and measured one at the time.
Applied Parts (& Patient Connections) not part of the measurement shall be left
floating. (ie not connected to real earth).
Applied Parts (& Patient Connections) not part of the measurement shall be left
floating. (ie not connected to real earth).
The test is conducted by applying a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal
50Hz signal (60Hz where this is the mains frequency) between the Applied Part and the
Enclosure and Earth connection of the EUT connected to real Earth.
The test is conducted by applying a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal
50Hz signal (60Hz where this is the mains frequency) between the Applied Part and the
Enclosure and Earth connection of the EUT connected to real Earth.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
The IEC 62353 / Applied Part Leakage can be performed in two different methods;
The IEC 62353 / Applied Part Leakage can be performed in two different methods;
•
•
•
•
Direct Method
Alternative Method
Direct Method
Alternative Method
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth between
the Applied Part and the real earth grouped with EUT earth and conductive parts not
connected to earth (Class I) or the real earth connected to the Class II enclosure.
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth between
the Applied Part and the real earth grouped with EUT earth and conductive parts not
connected to earth (Class I) or the real earth connected to the Class II enclosure.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains.
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
Warning This Applied Part Direct Leakage test is similar to that of the F-Type leakage
test according to IEC 60601 using a equivalent current limited voltage source to
produce the mains potential. Both sources depend on a current limiting resistor which
could cause a significant voltage drop.
Warning This Applied Part Direct Leakage test is similar to that of the F-Type leakage
test according to IEC 60601 using a equivalent current limited voltage source to
produce the mains potential. Both sources depend on a current limiting resistor which
could cause a significant voltage drop.
Unlike the IEC 60601-1 requirements, the voltage drop caused by the current limiting
resistor is compensated for in the IEC 62353 thus potentially resulting in a higher
reading than the typical IEC 60601-1 F-type test. Please refer to the manufacturers
recommendations.
Unlike the IEC 60601-1 requirements, the voltage drop caused by the current limiting
resistor is compensated for in the IEC 62353 thus potentially resulting in a higher
reading than the typical IEC 60601-1 F-type test. Please refer to the manufacturers
recommendations.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
106
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
106
All Patient Connections of a single function within an Applied Part shall be connected
together (BF & CF) and measured one at the time.
All Patient Connections of a single function within an Applied Part shall be connected
together (BF & CF) and measured one at the time.
Applied Parts (& Patient Connections) not part of the measurement shall be left
floating. (ie not connected to real earth).
Applied Parts (& Patient Connections) not part of the measurement shall be left
floating. (ie not connected to real earth).
The test is conducted by applying a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal
50Hz signal (60Hz where this is the mains frequency) between the Applied Part and the
Enclosure and Earth connection of the EUT connected to real Earth.
The test is conducted by applying a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal
50Hz signal (60Hz where this is the mains frequency) between the Applied Part and the
Enclosure and Earth connection of the EUT connected to real Earth.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
Leakage measurements to IEC 62353 are done using the RMS value instead of the
separate AC and DC values used in the IEC 60601-1 standard.
The IEC 62353 / Applied Part Leakage can be performed in two different methods;
The IEC 62353 / Applied Part Leakage can be performed in two different methods;
•
•
•
•
Direct Method
Alternative Method
Direct Method
Alternative Method
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth between
the Applied Part and the real earth grouped with EUT earth and conductive parts not
connected to earth (Class I) or the real earth connected to the Class II enclosure.
Direct method: The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601
standard – see Appendix E) is positioned in the leakage return path to earth between
the Applied Part and the real earth grouped with EUT earth and conductive parts not
connected to earth (Class I) or the real earth connected to the Class II enclosure.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains.
Measurements are done in both polarities of the incoming mains.
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
The EUT must be positioned floating to avoid secondary earth connections influencing
the measuring process.
Warning This Applied Part Direct Leakage test is similar to that of the F-Type leakage
test according to IEC 60601 using a equivalent current limited voltage source to
produce the mains potential. Both sources depend on a current limiting resistor which
could cause a significant voltage drop.
Warning This Applied Part Direct Leakage test is similar to that of the F-Type leakage
test according to IEC 60601 using a equivalent current limited voltage source to
produce the mains potential. Both sources depend on a current limiting resistor which
could cause a significant voltage drop.
Unlike the IEC 60601-1 requirements, the voltage drop caused by the current limiting
resistor is compensated for in the IEC 62353 thus potentially resulting in a higher
reading than the typical IEC 60601-1 F-type test. Please refer to the manufacturers
recommendations.
Unlike the IEC 60601-1 requirements, the voltage drop caused by the current limiting
resistor is compensated for in the IEC 62353 thus potentially resulting in a higher
reading than the typical IEC 60601-1 F-type test. Please refer to the manufacturers
recommendations.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
106
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
106
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
Applied Part and all mains parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
Applied Part and all mains parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
The test is performed using a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The test is performed using a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned between the Applied Part and voltage source.
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned between the Applied Part and voltage source.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to fully expose the potential leakage.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to fully expose the potential leakage.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
107
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
107
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
Applied Part and all mains parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
Alternative method; This method is in fact similar to a dielectric test between the
Applied Part and all mains parts, EUT earth and Enclosure connected together.
The test is performed using a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The test is performed using a current limited (3.5mA) mains potential sinusoidal 50Hz
signal. (60Hz where this is the mains frequency)
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned between the Applied Part and voltage source.
The 1kȍ measuring device (equivalent to that used in the IEC 60601 standard – see
Appendix E) is positioned between the Applied Part and voltage source.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
As Live and neutral are shortened, the Device will not be powered and mains reversal
is not applicable.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
Due to the Alternative measuring method, the EUT doesn’t require to be positioned
isolated from earth.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to fully expose the potential leakage.
The Alternative Method is not suitable for equipment having active circuitry and relies
on incoming mains to fully expose the potential leakage.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
The Alternative method is highly repeatable and as such is ideal for trend analysis on
Medical Equipment not including active circuitry.
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
107
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
107
Appendix D Pass / Fail limits of IEC 62353
Appendix D Pass / Fail limits of IEC 62353
APPLIED PART
Current in μA (RMS)
APPLIED PART
Type B
Type BF Type CF
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
Equipment Leakage – alternative method
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment
Type B
Type BF Type CF
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
5000μA
50μA
5000μA
50μA
Equipment Leakage – alternative method
1000μA
500μA
Equipment leakage – direct or differential method
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment (touch current)
Current in μA (RMS)
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment
Equipment leakage – direct or differential method
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
5000μA
50μA
5000μA
50μA
Patient leakage current – alternative method (a.c.)
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment (touch current)
Patient leakage current – alternative method (a.c.)
– Class I & II
Patient leakage current – direct method (a.c.)
– Class I & II
Patient leakage current – direct method (a.c.)
– Class I & II
– Class I & II
NOTE 1
This IEC 62353 standard does not provide measuring methods and allowable
values for equipment producing d.c. leakage currents. In such a case the manufacturer
should give information in accompanying documents.
NOTE 1
This IEC 62353 standard does not provide measuring methods and allowable
values for equipment producing d.c. leakage currents. In such a case the manufacturer
should give information in accompanying documents.
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
Particular standards may allow different values of leakage current
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
108
Particular standards may allow different values of leakage current
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix D Pass / Fail limits of IEC 62353
Appendix D Pass / Fail limits of IEC 62353
APPLIED PART
Current in μA (RMS)
Type B
APPLIED PART
Type BF Type CF
Equipment Leakage – alternative method
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
5000μA
50μA
Type BF Type CF
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
1000μA
500μA
5000μA
50μA
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment (touch current)
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
500μA
100μA
5000μA
50μA
5000μA
50μA
Patient leakage current – alternative method (a.c.)
Patient leakage current – direct method (a.c.)
– Class I & II
Type B
Equipment leakage – direct or differential method
Patient leakage current – alternative method (a.c.)
– Class I & II
Current in μA (RMS)
Equipment Leakage – alternative method
Equipment leakage – direct or differential method
– Class I Equipment
– Class II Equipment (touch current)
108
– Class I & II
Patient leakage current – direct method (a.c.)
– Class I & II
NOTE 1
This IEC 62353 standard does not provide measuring methods and allowable
values for equipment producing d.c. leakage currents. In such a case the manufacturer
should give information in accompanying documents.
NOTE 1
This IEC 62353 standard does not provide measuring methods and allowable
values for equipment producing d.c. leakage currents. In such a case the manufacturer
should give information in accompanying documents.
NOTE 2
NOTE 2
Particular standards may allow different values of leakage current
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
108
Particular standards may allow different values of leakage current
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
108
Appendix E
IEC 60601-1 Measuring Device
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix E
Appendix E
109
IEC 60601-1 Measuring Device
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix E
109
IEC 60601-1 Measuring Device
109
IEC 60601-1 Measuring Device
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
109
Appendix F
Firmware Route Map
Appendix F
Auto Mode
Manual Mode
Firmware Route Map
Auto Mode
Earth Bond
Insulation >
IEC 62353 >
IEC 60601-1 >
Manual Mode
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
Equipment Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Earth Bond
Insulation >
IEC 62353 >
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
IEC 60601-1 >
Load test
IEC lead test
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
View Data
Data Transfer
Download to PC
Upload fro PC
Configuration Data
Clone Data
Load T’nT Logo
Data Transfer
Download to PC
Upload fro PC
Configuration Data
Clone Data
Load T’nT Logo
Setup
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
System Config
Bluetooth Favourites
User Admin >
Setup
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
System Config
Bluetooth Favourites
User Admin >
Preferences
Chance User
Change Password
User Profile
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
Preferences
Chance User
Change Password
User Profile
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
About
About
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
110
Firmware Route Map
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Appendix F
Auto Mode
Manual Mode
Equipment Leakage Test >
Load test
IEC lead test
View Data
Appendix F
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
110
Firmware Route Map
Auto Mode
Earth Bond
Insulation >
IEC 62353 >
IEC 60601-1 >
Manual Mode
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
Equipment Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Earth Bond
Insulation >
IEC 62353 >
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
IEC 60601-1 >
Load test
IEC lead test
Insulation EUT
Insulation AP
Insulation AP to mains
Equipment Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Differential
AP Leakage Test >
Direct
Alternative
Earth leakage
Enclosure Leakage
Patient Leakage
Patient Lkg (Auxiliary)
Patient Lkg (F-Type)
Load test
IEC lead test
View Data
View Data
Data Transfer
Download to PC
Upload fro PC
Configuration Data
Clone Data
Load T’nT Logo
Data Transfer
Download to PC
Upload fro PC
Configuration Data
Clone Data
Load T’nT Logo
Setup
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
System Config
Bluetooth Favourites
User Admin >
Setup
Test Sequences
Test Codes
Asset Trace Variables
System Config
Bluetooth Favourites
User Admin >
Preferences
Chance User
Change Password
User Profile
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
Memory Options
Restore Factory Settings
About
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
Preferences
Chance User
Change Password
User Profile
About
110
Rigel 288 Instruction Manual – Revision 2
110
331A550
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement